265
BBU3900 V100R003 Hardware Description Issue 03 Date 2010-10-25 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

BBU3900V100R003

Hardware Description

Issue 03

Date 2010-10-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Page 2: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 3: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

Page 4: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 5: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the BBU3900 hardware, such as boards, module, ports, cables, andconnectors, and the functions of the hardware.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

BBU3900 V100R003

Intended Audience

The intended audiences of this document are:

l Install engineersl Field engineersl System engineers

Organization1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, multiple matched cabinets must be configured to meetthe backup power, transmission, and capacity requirements. Different types of cabinet can becombined to form the DBS3900, providing multiple outdoor solutions.

BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

Page 6: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

4 Transmission Board Configurations

In different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signaltransmission.

5 CPRI Port Configurations

The CPRI port configurations involves the specifications and configuration principles of theCPRI ports on the BBU and RRU.

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.

7 BBU3900 Equipment

This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of theDBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configuredin the DBS3900.

9 BBU3900 Cables

This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, andinstallation positions.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA andSLPU.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided,will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

About This DocumentBBU3900

Hardware Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 7: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Symbol Description

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BBU3900Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

Page 8: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

About This DocumentBBU3900

Hardware Description

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 9: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description........................................................................1-1

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets.....................................................................................................2-12.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 Cabinets..........................................................................................2-42.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900.........................................................................................................2-252.3 Configuration of the SLPU...........................................................................................................................2-33

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets..............................................................................3-1

4 Transmission Board Configurations......................................................................................4-1

5 CPRI Port Configurations.........................................................................................................5-15.1 CPRI Port Specifications.................................................................................................................................5-25.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTS Only Base Station...............................................5-35.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM Only Base Station.................................................5-45.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM+UMTS Base Station.............................................5-55.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Station................................................................5-55.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Station ...............................................................5-65.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Station................................................................5-7

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System...................................................................................................6-16.1 BBU Monitoring Port......................................................................................................................................6-26.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinets............................................................................................................6-36.3 Customized Alarm Input.................................................................................................................................6-7

7 BBU3900 Equipment..................................................................................................................7-17.1 Exterior of the BBU3900................................................................................................................................7-27.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900..............................................................................................................7-3

7.2.1 WMPT....................................................................................................................................................7-47.2.2 GTMU....................................................................................................................................................7-87.2.3 LMPT...................................................................................................................................................7-147.2.4 WBBP...................................................................................................................................................7-177.2.5 LBBP....................................................................................................................................................7-207.2.6 FAN......................................................................................................................................................7-227.2.7 UPEU...................................................................................................................................................7-23

BBU3900Hardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

Page 10: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

7.2.8 UEIU....................................................................................................................................................7-267.2.9 UTRP....................................................................................................................................................7-277.2.10 USCU.................................................................................................................................................7-337.2.11 UBRI..................................................................................................................................................7-35

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900........................................................................................8-18.1 Power Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................8-28.2 Transmission Cable Connections..................................................................................................................8-11

8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base Station.........................................8-148.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base Station............................................8-168.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base Station......................................8-178.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base Station.........................................8-208.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base Station..........................................8-238.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base Station.............................................8-248.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-258.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-288.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-318.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-338.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route BackupTransmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................8-348.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route BackupTransmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................8-368.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-388.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-418.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-438.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-478.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-508.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route Backup TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-528.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-538.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-568.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-588.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Separate Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-62

ContentsBBU3900

Hardware Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 11: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-658.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route Backup TransmissionMode..............................................................................................................................................................8-678.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-698.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode.......................................................................................................................................................................8-70

8.3 CPRI Cable Connections...............................................................................................................................8-728.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base Station...................................................................8-728.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base Station.....................................................................8-738.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station................................................................8-748.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Station..................................................................................8-768.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Station................................................................................8-788.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station.............................................................................8-80

8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections..........................................................................................................8-81

9 BBU3900 Cables..........................................................................................................................9-19.1 List of BBU3900 Cables.................................................................................................................................9-39.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................9-59.3 BBU Power Cable...........................................................................................................................................9-69.4 BBU Power cable(OMB)................................................................................................................................9-79.5 E1/T1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................................9-89.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer Cable........................................................................................................9-119.7 FE/GE Cable.................................................................................................................................................9-129.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable.......................................................................................................9-139.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports.......................................................................................................9-149.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports.........................................................................................................9-149.11 FE/GE Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................9-159.12 CPRI Optical Cable.....................................................................................................................................9-169.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBU.......................................................................9-189.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBU......................................................................9-199.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBU.....................................................................9-209.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal Cable................................................................................................................9-219.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC).........................................................................................9-229.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..........................................................................................9-229.19 BBU Alarm Cable.......................................................................................................................................9-239.20 GPS Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................9-25

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900......................................................................................10-110.1 EMUA.........................................................................................................................................................10-210.2 OMB............................................................................................................................................................10-210.3 IMB03.........................................................................................................................................................10-610.4 DCDU-03....................................................................................................................................................10-910.5 AC/DC Power Equipment.........................................................................................................................10-11

BBU3900Hardware Description Contents

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

Page 12: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

10.6 SLPU.........................................................................................................................................................10-1510.6.1 Exterior of SLPU..............................................................................................................................10-1510.6.2 UELP................................................................................................................................................10-1510.6.3 UFLP................................................................................................................................................10-1710.6.4 USLP2..............................................................................................................................................10-18

ContentsBBU3900

Hardware Description

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 13: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figures

Figure 2-1 Exteriors of the cabinets.....................................................................................................................2-2Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets............................................................................2-4Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................2-9Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................2-9Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets..................................................................................2-15Figure 2-6 Component configuration of the OMB.............................................................................................2-21Figure 2-7 Slots in the BBU3900.......................................................................................................................2-25Figure 2-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode.......................................................................2-26Figure 2-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode.......................................................................2-28Figure 2-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode......................................................................2-29Figure 2-11 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode.....................................................................2-30Figure 2-12 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode......................................................................2-32Figure 2-13 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode......................................................................2-33Figure 2-14 Slots of the SLPU...........................................................................................................................2-34Figure 3-1 Configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required...................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required...................................3-3Figure 3-3 Configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required...................................3-4Figure 3-4 Configurations of the OMB................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-5 1 TMC.................................................................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-6 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC.....................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-7 1 TMC with two built-in DCDUs.......................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-8 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC with two built-in DCDUs...........................................................3-6Figure 3-9 Configurations of the OMB................................................................................................................3-6Figure 5-1 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-4Figure 5-2 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Basic CPRI port connection principles...............................................................................................5-5Figure 5-4 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-7Figure 5-6 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection................................................................5-7Figure 6-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.......................................................................................... 6-2Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30............................6-3Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A)...........6-4Figure 6-4 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)........... 6-4

BBU3900Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

Page 14: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 6-5 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B)........... 6-5Figure 6-6 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered and monitored by the APM30H(Ver.B)...................................................................................................................................................................6-5Figure 6-7 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB...............................6-5Figure 6-8 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110V/220V) scenario...................6-6Figure 6-9 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110V/220V) scenario..............6-6Figure 6-10 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H.........6-6Figure 6-11 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB.............................6-7Figure 6-12 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24DC power supply scenario....................................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-13 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (+24 V DC) scenario...................6-7Figure 6-14 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU.......................................................................6-8Figure 6-15 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)...............................................................................6-9Figure 6-16 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2).............................................................................6-10Figure 7-1 BBU3900............................................................................................................................................7-2Figure 7-2 The position of the ESN (1)................................................................................................................7-2Figure 7-3 The position of the ESN (2)................................................................................................................7-3Figure 7-4 Panel of the WMPT............................................................................................................................7-4Figure 7-5 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT........................................................................................7-5Figure 7-6 DIP switches on the WMPT...............................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-7 GTMU panel.......................................................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-8 GTMUb panel.....................................................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-9 Panel of the LMPT...........................................................................................................................7-14Figure 7-10 Panel of the WBBPa.......................................................................................................................7-17Figure 7-11 Panel of the WBBPb.......................................................................................................................7-17Figure 7-12 Panel of the WBBPd.......................................................................................................................7-17Figure 7-13 Panel of the LBBP..........................................................................................................................7-20Figure 7-14 Panel of the LBBP..........................................................................................................................7-20Figure 7-15 Panel of the FAN unit.....................................................................................................................7-23Figure 7-16 Panel of the UPEUA.......................................................................................................................7-24Figure 7-17 Panel of the UPEUB.......................................................................................................................7-24Figure 7-18 Slots in the BBU.............................................................................................................................7-25Figure 7-19 Panel of the UEIU...........................................................................................................................7-26Figure 7-20 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports..........................................................................7-28Figure 7-21 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.........................................7-28Figure 7-22 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1 .................................................................................7-28Figure 7-23 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports........................................................................7-28Figure 7-24 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4.............................................................................................7-31Figure 7-25 DIP switch on the UTRPb4............................................................................................................7-31Figure 7-26 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U).........................................................................................................7-33Figure 7-27 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)............................................................................................................7-33Figure 7-28 Panel of the UBRI...........................................................................................................................7-35Figure 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC.........8-2

FiguresBBU3900

Hardware Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 15: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H(Ver. A)+1 BBC....................................................................................................................................................8-3Figure 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H(Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-4Figure 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H(Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D...........................................................................................................................................8-5Figure 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H(Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-6Figure 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H(Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D...........................................................................................................................................8-7Figure 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H(Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T...........................................................................................................................................8-8Figure 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs.............................................8-9Figure 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)......................8-10Figure 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)....................8-10Figure 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-14Figure 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-14Figure 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections.................................................................................................8-15Figure 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-15Figure 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-16Figure 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections.................................................................................................8-16Figure 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-17Figure 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1)...........................................................................................................8-17Figure 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2)...........................................................................................................8-18Figure 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)...........................................................................................8-18Figure 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)...........................................................................................8-19Figure 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)..............................................................................................8-19Figure 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)..............................................................................................8-20Figure 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1)...........................................................................................................8-20Figure 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2)...........................................................................................................8-21Figure 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)...........................................................................................8-21Figure 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)...........................................................................................8-22Figure 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)..............................................................................................8-22Figure 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)..............................................................................................8-22Figure 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-23Figure 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-23Figure 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................8-24Figure 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................8-24Figure 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1).............................................................................................................................................................................8-25Figure 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2).............................................................................................................................................................................8-26Figure 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................................8-26Figure 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................8-27

BBU3900Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

Page 16: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1).................................................8-27Figure 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2).................................................8-28Figure 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1).............................................................................................................................................................................8-28Figure 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2).............................................................................................................................................................................8-29Figure 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................................8-30Figure 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode....................................................8-30Figure 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1).................................................8-30Figure 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2).................................................8-31Figure 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode............... 8-32Figure 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1)........8-32Figure 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2)........8-33Figure 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode............................................................... 8-33Figure 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1).........................................................8-34Figure 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2).........................................................8-34Figure 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-35Figure 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-36Figure 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-37Figure 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-38Figure 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-38Figure 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-39Figure 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-39Figure 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40Figure 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-41Figure 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-41Figure 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42Figure 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42Figure 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1).......... 8-43Figure 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2).......... 8-44Figure 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1).......... 8-44Figure 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2).......... 8-45Figure 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........... 8-46Figure 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........... 8-46

FiguresBBU3900

Hardware Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 17: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-47Figure 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-47Figure 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-48Figure 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-48Figure 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)...........8-49Figure 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)...........8-49Figure 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51Figure 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51Figure 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-52Figure 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53Figure 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-54Figure 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-54Figure 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55Figure 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55Figure 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-56Figure 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-57Figure 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-57Figure 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-58Figure 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-58Figure 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-59Figure 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-60Figure 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-60Figure 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).........8-61Figure 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).........8-61Figure 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-62Figure 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-63Figure 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........8-63Figure 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........8-64Figure 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).........8-64Figure 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).........8-65Figure 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66Figure 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66

BBU3900Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

Page 18: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-68Figure 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network..................................................................................................................... 8-68Figure 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electricalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-69Figure 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE opticalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-70Figure 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electricalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71Figure 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE opticalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71Figure 8-108 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-72Figure 8-109 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-73Figure 8-110 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-73Figure 8-111 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-74Figure 8-112 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-74Figure 8-113 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-75Figure 8-114 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-75Figure 8-115 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-76Figure 8-116 CPRI cable connections (4)..........................................................................................................8-76Figure 8-117 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-77Figure 8-118 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-77Figure 8-119 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-78Figure 8-120 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-78Figure 8-121 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-79Figure 8-122 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-79Figure 8-123 CPRI cable connections (4)..........................................................................................................8-79Figure 8-124 CPRI cable connections (1)..........................................................................................................8-80Figure 8-125 CPRI cable connections (2)..........................................................................................................8-80Figure 8-126 CPRI cable connections (3)..........................................................................................................8-81Figure 8-127 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1BBC.....................................................................................................................................................................8-82Figure 8-128 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC............................................................................................................................ 8-83Figure 8-129 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T...................................................................................................................8-84Figure 8-130 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-85Figure 8-131 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC............................................................................................................................ 8-86Figure 8-132 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T...................................................................................................................8-87Figure 8-133 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-88

FiguresBBU3900

Hardware Description

xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 19: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-134 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-89Figure 8-135 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supplyscenario................................................................................................................................................................8-89Figure 8-136 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs...............................8-90Figure 8-137 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).............................................................................................................................................................................8-91Figure 8-138 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B).............................................................................................................................................................................8-91Figure 8-139 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supplyscenario................................................................................................................................................................8-92Figure 9-1 PGND cable........................................................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-2 BBU power cable (1)..........................................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-3 BBU power cable (2)..........................................................................................................................9-7Figure 9-4 Appearance of power cable(AC OMB)..............................................................................................9-8Figure 9-5 Appearance of power cable(DC OMB)..............................................................................................9-8Figure 9-6 E1/T1 cable.........................................................................................................................................9-9Figure 9-7 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable...............................................................................................9-11Figure 9-8 FE/GE cable......................................................................................................................................9-12Figure 9-9 FE/GE surge protection transfer cable..............................................................................................9-13Figure 9-10 Cable between two FE electrical ports...........................................................................................9-14Figure 9-11 Cable between two FE optical ports...............................................................................................9-15Figure 9-12 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15Figure 9-13 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15Figure 9-14 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)................................................................................9-15Figure 9-15 Multi-mode optical cable ...............................................................................................................9-16Figure 9-16 Single-mode optical cable..............................................................................................................9-16Figure 9-17 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU.............................................................9-18Figure 9-18 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU............................................................9-19Figure 9-19 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU...........................................................9-20Figure 9-20 EMUA monitoring signal cable......................................................................................................9-21Figure 9-21 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..............................................................................9-22Figure 9-22 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...............................................................................9-23Figure 9-23 BBU alarm cable............................................................................................................................9-24Figure 9-24 GPS clock signal cable...................................................................................................................9-25Figure 10-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)...............................................................................................10-2Figure 10-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB...............................................................................................10-4Figure 10-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB...............................................................................................10-5Figure 10-4 IMB03.............................................................................................................................................10-6Figure 10-5 DC IMB03......................................................................................................................................10-7Figure 10-6 AC IMB03......................................................................................................................................10-8Figure 10-7 DCDU-03........................................................................................................................................10-9Figure 10-8 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03..............................................................................................10-10Figure 10-9 AC/DC power equipment.............................................................................................................10-11

BBU3900Hardware Description Figures

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xvii

Page 20: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-10 DIP switches on the PMU..........................................................................................................10-14Figure 10-11 SLPU..........................................................................................................................................10-15Figure 10-12 UELP panel.................................................................................................................................10-16Figure 10-13 DIP switch on the UELP............................................................................................................10-16Figure 10-14 Panel of the UFLP......................................................................................................................10-17Figure 10-15 Panel of the USLP2....................................................................................................................10-18Figure 10-16 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2................10-18

FiguresBBU3900

Hardware Description

xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 21: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Tables

Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets....................................................................2-5Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets..................................................................2-10Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets.........................................................................2-15Table 2-4 Functions of the OMB........................................................................................................................2-22Table 2-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode.................................................2-25Table 2-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode.................................................2-26Table 2-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode................................................. 2-28Table 2-8 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode.................................................2-29Table 2-9 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode................................................. 2-31Table 2-10 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode............................................... 2-32Table 2-11 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1)........................................................................................2-34Table 2-12 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2)........................................................................................2-34Table 4-1 Transmission modes supported by the boards.....................................................................................4-1Table 5-1 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU......................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU......................................................................................5-2Table 6-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU..............................................................................................................6-2Table 6-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900........................................................................6-8Table 6-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number of customized alarms...............................................................................................................................................................................6-9Table 7-1 LEDs on the WMPT panel...................................................................................................................7-5Table 7-2 LEDs and their status...........................................................................................................................7-6Table 7-3 Ports on the WMPT panel....................................................................................................................7-6Table 7-4 Settings of SW1....................................................................................................................................7-7Table 7-5 Settings of SW2....................................................................................................................................7-8Table 7-6 LEDs on the GTMU.............................................................................................................................7-9Table 7-7 LEDs and their status.........................................................................................................................7-10Table 7-8 Ports on the GTMU............................................................................................................................7-11Table 7-9 Details of the DIP Switch S1............................................................................................................. 7-12Table 7-10 Details of the DIP Switch S2........................................................................................................... 7-13Table 7-11 Details of the DIP Switch S4........................................................................................................... 7-13Table 7-12 Details of the DIP Switch S5........................................................................................................... 7-13Table 7-13 LEDs on the LMPT..........................................................................................................................7-15Table 7-14 LEDs and their status.......................................................................................................................7-15Table 7-15 Ports on the LMPT...........................................................................................................................7-16

BBU3900Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

Page 22: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-16 Specifications of the WBBP.............................................................................................................7-18Table 7-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status................................................................................................7-18Table 7-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................7-19Table 7-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb..............................................................................7-19Table 7-20 Ports on the WBBPd........................................................................................................................7-20Table 7-21 Specifications of the LBBP..............................................................................................................7-20Table 7-22 LEDs on the LBBP...........................................................................................................................7-21Table 7-23 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................7-22Table 7-24 Ports on the LBBP............................................................................................................................7-22Table 7-25 LED on the FAN unit and its status.................................................................................................7-23Table 7-26 LED on the UPEU and its status......................................................................................................7-25Table 7-27 Ports on the panel of the UPEU.......................................................................................................7-25Table 7-28 Ports on the panel of the UEIU........................................................................................................7-27Table 7-29 Specifications of the UTRP..............................................................................................................7-27Table 7-30 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP......................................................................................................7-29Table 7-31 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9...................................................................7-30Table 7-32 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports............................................................................7-30Table 7-33 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s..........................7-30Table 7-34 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1......................................................................................7-30Table 7-35 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports........................................................................7-31Table 7-36 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32Table 7-37 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32Table 7-38 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................7-32Table 7-39 LEDs on the USCU..........................................................................................................................7-34Table 7-40 LEDs on the TOD port.....................................................................................................................7-35Table 7-41 Ports on the USCU...........................................................................................................................7-35Table 7-42 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.......................................................................................................7-36Table 7-43 CPRI link status LED.......................................................................................................................7-36Table 7-44 Ports on the panel of the UBRI........................................................................................................7-37Table 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC..........8-2Table 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC.............................................................................................................................................................8-3Table 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-4Table 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200D....................................................................................................................................................8-5Table 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-6Table 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200D....................................................................................................................................................8-7Table 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS200T....................................................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs...............................................8-9Table 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).......................8-10

TablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 23: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)..................... 8-11Table 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-14Table 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-15Table 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................8-15Table 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-16Table 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-16Table 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................8-17Table 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-17Table 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................8-18Table 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................8-18Table 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1).............................................................................................8-19Table 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2).............................................................................................8-19Table 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)................................................................................................8-20Table 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)................................................................................................8-20Table 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................8-21Table 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................8-21Table 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1).............................................................................................8-21Table 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2).............................................................................................8-22Table 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)................................................................................................8-22Table 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)................................................................................................8-23Table 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-23Table 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-24Table 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................8-24Table 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................8-25Table 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1).............................................................................................................................................................................8-25Table 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2).............................................................................................................................................................................8-26Table 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode..................................................................... 8-26Table 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode......................................................8-27Table 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)...................................................8-28Table 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)...................................................8-28Table 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (1).............................................................................................................................................................................8-29Table 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTS base station (2).............................................................................................................................................................................8-29Table 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode..................................................................... 8-30Table 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode......................................................8-30Table 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)...................................................8-31Table 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)...................................................8-31Table 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode.................8-32Table 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (1).........8-32Table 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE mode (2).........8-33

BBU3900Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

Page 24: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode.................................................................8-33Table 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)..........................................................8-34Table 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)..........................................................8-34Table 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-35Table 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-36Table 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-37Table 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-38Table 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-39Table 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-39Table 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40Table 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-40Table 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-41Table 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-42Table 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-42Table 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-43Table 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-43Table 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-44Table 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-45Table 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-45Table 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).............8-46Table 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).............8-46Table 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-47Table 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-48Table 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............8-48Table 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............8-49Table 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).............8-49Table 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).............8-50Table 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51Table 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-51Table 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53

TablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 25: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-53Table 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-54Table 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-54Table 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-55Table 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-56Table 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPT for datatransmission.........................................................................................................................................................8-56Table 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPT for data transmission.............................................................................................................................................................................8-57Table 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................8-57Table 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP for data transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................8-58Table 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-59Table 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-59Table 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-60Table 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-60Table 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-61Table 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-62Table 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-62Table 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-63Table 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-63Table 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-64Table 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........8-64Table 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........8-65Table 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-66Table 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-67Table 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-68Table 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the transport network.....................................................................................................................8-68Table 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electricalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-69Table 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE opticalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-70Table 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electricalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71Table 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE opticalport).....................................................................................................................................................................8-71

BBU3900Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiii

Page 26: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-108 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1BBC.....................................................................................................................................................................8-82Table 8-109 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC..................................................................................................................................8-83Table 8-110 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T........................................................................................................................8-84Table 8-111 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-85Table 8-112 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC..................................................................................................................................8-86Table 8-113 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T........................................................................................................................8-87Table 8-114 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-88Table 8-115 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T......................................................................................................8-89Table 8-116 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the AC power supplyscenario................................................................................................................................................................8-90Table 8-117 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs.................................8-90Table 8-118 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A).............................................................................................................................................................................8-91Table 8-119 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B).............................................................................................................................................................................8-92Table 8-120 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in the DC power supplyscenario................................................................................................................................................................8-92Table 9-1 List of BBU3900 Cables......................................................................................................................9-3Table 9-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable.......................................................................9-7Table 9-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable......................................................................9-7Table 9-4 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.........................................................................................9-9Table 9-5 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.............................................................9-9Table 9-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable..................................................9-10Table 9-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable........................................9-11Table 9-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable..............................................................................9-13Table 9-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable......................................9-14Table 9-10 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable betweenthe BBU and RRU...............................................................................................................................................9-17Table 9-11 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-mode optical cable betweenRRUs...................................................................................................................................................................9-17Table 9-12 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the single-mode optical cable andrecommended connections..................................................................................................................................9-17Table 9-13 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU.............................................................................................................................................................................9-18Table 9-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU.............................................................................................................................................................................9-19Table 9-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.............................................................................................................................................................................9-20Table 9-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable..............................................9-21

TablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

xxiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 27: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 9-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).......................9-22Table 9-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)........................9-23Table 9-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.....................................................................9-24Table 10-1 Specifications of the OMB...............................................................................................................10-5Table 10-2 Specifications of the IMB03............................................................................................................10-8Table 10-3 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03..........................................................................10-9Table 10-4 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03...............................................................................................10-11Table 10-5 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment...........................................................................................10-12Table 10-6 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier..................................................................................................10-12Table 10-7 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module................................................................................10-13Table 10-8 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU......................................................................................10-14Table 10-9 Ports of the UELP..........................................................................................................................10-16Table 10-10 DIP switch on the UELP..............................................................................................................10-17Table 10-11 Ports on the panel of the UFLP....................................................................................................10-17Table 10-12 Ports on the panel of the USLP2..................................................................................................10-18Table 10-13 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2..................10-19

BBU3900Hardware Description Tables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv

Page 28: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 29: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

This provides the changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description.

03 (2010-10-25)This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no information is added.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), the following part is modified:

Part Modification

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 The monitoring principle of the OMB ismodified.

Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no information is deleted.

02 (2010-08-30)This is the first commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), this issue is added with the following topic:l 6.1 BBU Monitoring Portl 6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinetsl 6.3 Customized Alarm Inputl 5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base Stationl 5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base Stationl 5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base Stationl 8.2 Transmission Cable Connectionsl 8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base Stationl 8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base Stationl 8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base Station

Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), the following part is modified:

BBU3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware Description

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

Page 30: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Part Modification

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900 The position of the ESN is added.

10.6.4 USLP2 The mapping relationship between the pins inthe input and output ports on the USLP2 isadded.

Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), this issue deletes the following topics:l External monitoring portl Monitoring schemel Monitoring board configurations

01 (2010-05-04)This is the draft version.

1 Changes in BBU3900 Hardware DescriptionBBU3900

Hardware Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 31: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 consists of the BBU3900 and different types of RRUs. The RRUs can be installedremotely so that the DBS3900 can be used in various scenarios outdoors. To meet thecomplicated and various environments outdoors, Huawei provides multiple cabinets withdifferent functions for the distributed base station. The cabinets are the APM series cabinets(such as APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver. B)), TMC series cabinets (such asTMC, TMC11H (Ver.A), and TMC11H (Ver. B)), and battery cabinets (such as the BBC,IBBS200D, and IBBS200T). Figure 2-1 shows the exteriors of the cabinets.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

Page 32: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 2-1 Exteriors of the cabinets

The APM series cabinets are the power cabinets used for Huawei radio communication productsoutdoors. The APM series cabinets provide AC and DC power distribution functions fordistributed base stations and separate base stations used outdoors and also provide space forcustomer equipment.

The APM30 is different from the APM30H (Ver. A) in heat dissipation and monitoring modes.The APM30 uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the APM30H (Ver. A)uses the core of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation.The APM30 is configured with the APMI and AFMU for environment and power monitoring,and the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the HEUA for fan monitoring and alarm reporting.

The APM30H (Ver. A) is different from the APM30H (Ver. B) in monitoring and powerdistribution modes. The APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the HEUA for fan monitoringand alarm reporting, and the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the CMUA as the central

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 33: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

monitoring unit. The APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU as the power distributionunit, and the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the EPS subrack as the power distributionunit. In addition, the APM30H (Ver.B) is configured with the Electronic Labeling Unit (ELU)for automatic cabinet type reporting.

The TMC series cabinets are the transmission cabinets used for Huawei radio communicationproducts outdoors. The TMC series cabinets provide DC power distribution functions fordistributed base stations and separate base stations and also provide space for customerequipment.

The TMC is different from the TMC11H (Ver. A) in heat dissipation and monitoring modes,and the TMC11H (Ver. A) is different from the TMC11H (Ver.B) in monitoring mode. TheTMC uses the breathable film and fans for heat dissipation, and the TMC11H (Ver. A) uses thecore of the heat exchanger and inner and outer air circulation fans for heat dissipation. The TMCis configured with the APMI and AFMU as the monitoring unit, the TMC11H (Ver.A) isconfigured with the HEUA as the monitoring unit, and the TMC11H (Ver. B) is configured withthe CMUA and HPMI as the monitoring unit. In addition, the TMC11H (Ver. B) is configuredwith the ELU for automatic cabinet type reporting.

The BBC, IBBS200D, and IBBS200T are the battery cabinets used for Huawei radiocommunication products outdoors. The cabinets provide space for batteries, which provide long-duration backup power for the distributed base station and separate base station. The IBBS200Dis different from the IBBS200T in the configurations of the modules in the cabinets. For details,see 2.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 Cabinets.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Page 34: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

2.1 Module Configurations in the DBS3900 CabinetsThis section describes the module configurations in the DBS3900 cabinets.

APMNOTEFor details about the functions of the DBS3900 cabinets, see the APM30 User Guide, APM30H UserGuide, and APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200D/T User Guide.

The APM series cabinets are divided into the APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver.B) based on different versions. Figure 2-2 shows the module configurations in the APM seriescabinets.

Figure 2-2 Module configurations in the APM series cabinets

The APM series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation, power distribution,and monitoring modes. The differences are achieved through the internal components of thecabinets, as listed in Table 2-1.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 35: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 2-1 Functions of the components in the APM series cabinets

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

APM30 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,APMI, andAFMU.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.

4 PSU (AC/DC)

Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto -48 VDC power,which isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isa powermonitoringunit, which isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

Page 36: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

APM30H(Ver. A)

1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,HEUA, andHPMI.

2 PDU Mandatory 1 The PDUdistributesAC powerand DCpower.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder thePDU,processingbasebandsignals.

4 PSU (AC/DC)

Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto -48 VDC power,which isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

5 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 37: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

APM30H(Ver. B)

1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,HPMI, andCMUA.

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 The SLPU isinstalled inthe top 1 Uspace of thecabinet,providingprotectionfor trunksignals as amandatorycomponent.The SLPU isconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP.The SLPUcan alsoprovideprotectionformonitoringsignalcables. Toenable thefunction, theSLPU mustbe installedin the 1 Uspace underthe BBU andconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

Page 38: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

3 EPS Mandatory 1 The EPSdistributesAC powerand DCpower,which isconfiguredonly in theAPM30H(Ver. B).

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theEPS,processingbasebandsignals.

5 PSU (AC/DC)

Mandatory 3 The PSUconverts 220V AC powerinto -48 VDC power,which isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

6 PMU Mandatory 1 The PMU isa powermonitoringunit, which isconfiguredonly in theAC cabinet.

TMCThe TMC series cabinets are divided into the TMC, TMC11H (Ver. A), and TMC11H (Ver. B)based on different versions. The TMC series cabinets can also be divided into the following twotypes based on different application scenarios:

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 39: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l TMC providing space for the transmission equipment, as shown in Figure 2-3

Figure 2-3 TMC series cabinets (1)

l TMC configured with the BBU in the -48 V DC power supply scenario, as shown in Figure

2-4

Figure 2-4 TMC series cabinets (2)

The TMC series cabinets are different from each other in heat dissipation and monitoring modes.The differences are achieved through the internal components of the cabinets, as listed in Table2-2.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

Page 40: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 2-2 Functions of the components in the TMC series cabinets

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

TMC 1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,APMI, andAFMU.

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l The TMCprovidingspace forthetransmissionequipment isconfigured with theDCDU-03C.

l The TMCconfigured with theBBU inthe -48 VDCpowersupplyscenarioisconfigured with theDCDU-03B.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 41: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.

TMC11H(Ver. A)

1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,HEUA, andHPMI.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-11

Page 42: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

2 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver. A)providingspace forthetransmissionequipment isconfigured with theDCDU-03C.

l TheTMC11H(Ver. A)configured with theBBU inthe -48 VDCpowersupplyscenarioisconfigured with theDCDU-03B.

3 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 43: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

TMC11H(Ver. B)

1 Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan boxis installed atthe top of thecabinet,configuredwith the fan,HPMI, andCMUA.

2 SLPU Mandatory 2 The SLPU isinstalled inthe top 1 Uspace of thecabinet,providingprotectionfor trunksignals as amandatorycomponent.The SLPU isconfiguredwith theUELP orUFLP.The SLPUcan alsoprovideprotectionformonitoringsignalcables. Toenable thefunction, theSLPU mustbe installedin the 1 Uspace underthe BBU andconfiguredwith twoUSLP2s.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

Page 44: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

3 DCDU-03 Mandatory 1 l TheTMC11H(Ver. B)providingspace forthetransmissionequipment isconfigured with theDCDU-03C.

l TheTMC11H(Ver. B)configured with theBBU3900 in the-48 V DCpowersupplyscenarioisconfigured with theDCDU-03B.

4 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceunder theDCDU-03B,processingbasebandsignals.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 45: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

BBC/IBBSThe battery cabinets are divided into the BBC, IBBS200T (Ver. A), IBBS200T (Ver. B), andIBBS200D based on different versions. Figure 2-5 shows the module configurations in thebattery cabinets.

Figure 2-5 Module configurations in the battery cabinets

The IBBS200D is different from the IBBS200T in heat dissipation mode. The differences areachieved through the monitoring modules installed in different positions in the cabinets, as listedin Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Functions of the components in the battery cabinets

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

BBC 1 Powersupply boxfor theheating film

Mandatory 1 The powersupply boxfeeds powerto the heatingfilm.

2 Ground barof the cabinet

Mandatory 1 The groundbar is usedfor thegrounding ofthecomponentsin thecabinet.

3 Battery Mandatory 8

4 Power boxfor the BBC

Mandatory 4 The powerbox providespower to thebatteries.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

Page 46: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

IBBS200T(Ver.A)

1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.

2 Transferterminal forsignal cables

Mandatory 1 The transferterminal isinstalled onthe inner sideof the frontdoor of thecabinet,consisting offourinterconnection terminals.

3 Transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TEC

Mandatory 1 The transferterminal isinstalled onthe inner sideof the frontdoor of thecabinet.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 47: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

4 Heatinsulationfoam

Mandatory 1 The heatinsulationfoam isinstalled onthe left in thecabinet.

5 Battery Mandatory 8 The batteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.

6 Junction boxfor the powercable

Mandatory 1 The junctionbox isinstalled onthe right intheIBBS200T,consisting ofthe copperbar, circuitbreaker forthe batteries,and MCB forthe TEC.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

Page 48: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

IBBS200T(Ver. B)

1 TEC Mandatory 1 The TEC isinstalled intheprotectinghood for theTEC on thefront door ofthe cabinet.The TECconsists ofthe TECmodule,inner aircirculationfan, outer aircirculationfan, heat-dissipationpiece, andmonitoringboard.

2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUAprovides thefunctions ofthetemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 49: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

3 Powerdistributionbox

Mandatory 8 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperright of thecabinet,transferringanddistributingthe power tothe TEC orfan and to thebatteries.

4 Battery Mandatory 1 The batteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.

IBBS200D 1 Fan Mandatory 2 The fan isinstalled onthe frontdoor of thecabinet,dissipatingthe heat inthe cabinet.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

Page 50: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

2 CMUA Mandatory 1 The CMUAprovides thefunctions ofthetemperaturecontrol,Booleanalarmdetection,and ELUidentification of thecabinet.

3 Battery Mandatory 8 The batteryprovideslong-durationbackuppower for abase station.

4 Powerdistributionbox

Optional 1 The powerdistributionbox isinstalled onthe upperright of thecabinet,transferringanddistributingthe power tothe TEC orfan and to thebatteries.

OMBThe OMB can be configured with different power equipment in different power supply scenarios.Figure 2-6 shows the cabinet configuration.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 51: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 2-6 Component configuration of the OMB

Table 2-4 lists the functions of the OMB.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

Page 52: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 2-4 Functions of the OMB

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

OMB (220V/110 V AC)

1 HEUA Mandatory 1 The HEUAmonitors theheatexchanger. Itprovidespower to theFAN unit,monitors thestatus of theFAN unit,collects thecabinetenvironmentmonitoringinformationand powersurgeprotectionalarminformation,and reportstheinformationto the maincontrol unit.

2 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceon the left ofthe OMB,processingbasebandsignals.

3 Outer aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The outer aircirculationfandissipates theheat in thecabinet.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 53: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

4 DCDU-03B Mandatory 1 TheDCDU-03Bprovidespower for theBBU, RRU,or othertransmissiondevices.

5 Inner aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The inner aircirculationfandissipates theheat in thecabinet.

OMB (-48 VDC)

1 HEUA Mandatory 1 The HEUAmonitors theheatexchanger. Itprovidespower to theFAN unit,monitors thestatus of theFAN unit,collects thecabinetenvironmentmonitoringinformationand powersurgeprotectionalarminformation,and reportstheinformationto the maincontrol unit.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

Page 54: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CabinetType

SN Module/Board

Optional/Mandatory

MaximumNumber ofBoards/ModulesConfigured in aSingleCabinet

Description

2 BBU Mandatory 1 The BBU isinstalled inthe 2 U spaceon the left ofthe OMB,processingbasebandsignals.

3 Outer aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The outer aircirculationfandissipates theheat in thecabinet.

4 AC surgeprotectionbox

Mandatory 1 The ACsurgeprotectionbox providesprotectionfor the ACinput power.

5 Powerequipment(AC/DC)

Mandatory 1 The AC/DCpower deviceprovidespower inputfor the BBU,RRU, orothertransmissiondevices.

6 Inner aircirculationfan

Mandatory 1 The inner aircirculationfandissipates theheat in thecabinet.

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 55: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

2.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900This section describes the board configurations of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafterreferred to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referredto as LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to asGL), and UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL) scenarios.

Slots in the BBU3900The board configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 inUO mode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, and BBU3900 in UL mode are thesame, as shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 Slots in the BBU3900

BBU3900 in GO ModeTable 2-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode.

Table 2-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

Page 56: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

Figure 2-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode.

Figure 2-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode

BBU3900 in UO ModeTable 2-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode.

Table 2-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

WMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or slot 7 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7 in the caseof a singleWMPT

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 57: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 Configured inslot 3 by default:l If an

expansion ofthe CPRIport isrequired,configurethe board inslot 2.

l If anexpansion ofthe CPRIport is notrequired,configurethe board in aslot, withslot priorityof slot 0, slot1, and slot 2.

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 4 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, and slot 5

Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 5, slot 0, andslot 1

USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or slot 0 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

Page 58: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 2-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UO mode.

Figure 2-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode

BBU3900 in LO ModeTable 2-7 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode.

Table 2-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

LMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7 in thecase of a singleLMPT

LBBP Mandatory 3 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 1, and slot 2in the case of asingle LBBP

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or slot 5 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 59: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, or slot 5

Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5 in the caseof a singleUSCU;configured inslot 5 in the caseof 1 U USCU (inthis case, slot 4is also occupied)Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1 if slot 4and slot 5 areoccupied;configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U USCU (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

Figure 2-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in LO mode.

Figure 2-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode

BBU3900 in GU Mode

Table 2-8 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode.

Table 2-8 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-29

Page 60: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)

WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 0, slot 1, andslot 2

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 4

Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 0, and slot 1

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

Figure 2-11 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GU mode.

Figure 2-11 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 61: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

BBU3900 in GL ModeTable 2-9 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode.

Table 2-9 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7

GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)

LBBP Mandatory 3 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 1, and slot 2

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 4

Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 0, and slot 1The slot priorityof the GO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 -

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-31

Page 62: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 2-12 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GL mode.

Figure 2-12 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode

BBU3900 in UL Mode

Table 2-10 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode.

Table 2-10 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 Configured onlyin slot 6

WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7

LBBP Mandatory 2 Slot 1 and slot 2 Configured onlyin slot 2 in thecase of a singleLBBP

WBBP Mandatory 3 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 3

Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 0, and slot 1in the case of asingle WBBP

FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16

UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU

UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 63: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot Remarks

UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, or slot 5

Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 5, slot 0, andslot 1The slot priorityof the UO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP

USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)

Figure 2-13 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UL mode.

Figure 2-13 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode

2.3 Configuration of the SLPUThis section describes the configuration principles of the SPLU.

Slots of the SLPUFigure 2-14 shows the slots of the SLPU.

BBU3900Hardware Description 2 Matched DBS3900 Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-33

Page 64: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 2-14 Slots of the SLPU

Configuration of the SLPU

When serving as a trunk signal protection unit, the SLPU is a mandatory component, and it isintegrated with a UELP or UFLP and installed in the 1 U space in the upper part of the cabinet.Table 2-11 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.

Table 2-11 Configuration principles of the SLPU (1)

Board Optional/Mandatory

MaximumQuantity

Slot ConfigurationRestriction

UELP Optional 4 Slots 0 to 3 The priorities ofthe slots inconfigurationare as follows indescendingorder: slot 2, slot0, slot 1, and slot3.

UFLP Optional 1 Slot 3 If both theUELP andUFLP areconfigured, theUFLP isinstalled in a slotwith a higherpriority than theUELP.

When serving as a monitoring signal protection unit for not more than 16 dry contacts, the SLPUis an optional component, and it is integrated with two USLP2s and installed in the 1 U spaceat the bottom of the BBU. Table 2-12 lists the configuration principles of the SLPU.

Table 2-12 Configuration principles of the SLPU (2)

Board Optional/Mandatory

Quantity Slot ConfigurationRestriction

USLP2 Optional 2 Slots 2 and 3 -

2 Matched DBS3900 CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

2-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 65: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

When the DBS3900 is installed outdoors, multiple matched cabinets must be configured to meetthe backup power, transmission, and capacity requirements. Different types of cabinet can becombined to form the DBS3900, providing multiple outdoor solutions.

Cabinet Configuration PrinciplesNOTEIn the following description, the APM is the APM30, APM30H (Ver. A), and APM30H (Ver. B). TheTMC falls into the categories of the TMC, TMC11H (Ver. A), and TMC11H (Ver. B).

l A single DBS3900 can be configured with a maximum of 12 RRUs. If there are more than12 RRUs, they must be configured in different base stations.

l A single APM or TMC can provide power to a maximum of six RRUs.l A single APM30/APM30H (Ver. A) can be configured with only a single TMC/TMC11H

(Ver. A) and a maximum of one IBBS200T.l A single APM30H (Ver. B) can be configured with only a single TMC11H (Ver. B) and a

maximum of two IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.l A maximum of six power cables and twelve 2-core optical cables can be led out from a

single APM.l A single DCDU supplies power to a maximum of six RRUs.l The APM or TMC can be installed on the floor or stacked on the battery cabinet.l The BBC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T can be stacked on each other or placed under a TMC.

When the BBC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked with the TMC, the BBC/IBBS200D/IBBS200T is stacked on the TMC.

l If auxiliary cabinets such as the battery cabinet or TMC are required during an initial siteconstruction, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left, and the primary cabinet ispositioned on the right. If both the battery cabinet and the TMC are required, the batterycabinet is positioned on the left of the primary cabinet, and the TMC is stacked on thebattery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

l Space must be reserved during an initial site construction for future capacity expansion. Inthe capacity expansion scenario, the original cabinets are not relocated while new cabinetsare added only from left to right. In a special scenario, new cabinets can be added fromright to left.

BBU3900Hardware Description 3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

Page 66: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen backup power is not required, one to six RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM is configured in a base station. When thespace required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM and one TMC areconfigured.

When backup power is not required, 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM and one extension APM areconfigured in a base station. When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 12U to 23 U, one primary APM, one extension APM, and one TMC are configured.

Figure 3-1 shows the configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required.

Figure 3-1 Configurations of the cabinets when backup power is not required

When 184 Ah/48 V backup power and one to six RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM and one IBBS are configured. When thespace required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM, one TMC, and oneIBBS are configured.

When 184 Ah/48 V backup power and 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extensionAPM30H (Ver.B), and two IBBSs are configured in a base station. When the space required forcustomer equipment ranges from 12 U to 23 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extensionAPM30H (Ver.B), two IBBSs, and one TMC are configured.

Figure 3-2 shows the configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required.

3 Configurations of the Matched CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 67: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 3-2 Configurations of the cabinets when 184 Ah/48 V backup power is required

When 368 Ah/48 V backup power and one to six RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 5 U, one APM30H (Ver. B) and two IBBSs are configured.When the space required for customer equipment ranges from 5 U to 16 U, one APM30H (Ver.B), one TMC, and two IBBSs are configured.

When 368 Ah/48 V backup power and 7 to 12 RRUs are required, and the space required forcustomer equipment is not more than 12 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extensionAPM30H (Ver.B), and four IBBSs are configured in a base station. When the space required forcustomer equipment ranges from 5 U to 23 U, one primary APM30H (Ver.B), one extensionAPM30H (Ver.B), four IBBSs, and one TMC are configured.

Figure 3-3 shows the configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required.

BBU3900Hardware Description 3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

Page 68: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 3-3 Configurations of the cabinets when 368 Ah/48 V backup power is required

When backup power is not required, one to two RRUs are required, one OMB with a built-inAC/DC power equipment is configured, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Configurations of the OMB

3 Configurations of the Matched CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 69: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

–48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

When one to six RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customerequipment is not more than 9 U, one TMC is configured. Figure 3-5 shows the cabinetconfiguration.

Figure 3-5 1 TMC

When one to six RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customerequipment ranges from 9 U to 20 U, one primary TMC and one extension TMC are configured.Figure 3-6 shows the cabinet configuration.

Figure 3-6 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC

When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customerequipment is not more than 8 U, one TMC with two built-in DCDUs is configured. Figure3-7 shows the cabinet configuration.

Figure 3-7 1 TMC with two built-in DCDUs

When 7 to 12 RRUs are configured in a base station, and the space required for customerequipment ranges from 8 U to 19 U, one primary TMC and one extension TMC are configured.The two TMCs are configured with two DCDUs. Figure 3-8 shows the cabinet configuration.

BBU3900Hardware Description 3 Configurations of the Matched Cabinets

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

Page 70: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 3-8 1 primary TMC+1 extension TMC with two built-in DCDUs

When one to three RRUs are required, one OMB with a built-in DCDU is configured, as shownin Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 Configurations of the OMB

3 Configurations of the Matched CabinetsBBU3900

Hardware Description

3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 71: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

4 Transmission Board Configurations

In different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signaltransmission.

Table 4-1 lists the transmission modes supported by the boards working in different modes.

Table 4-1 Transmission modes supported by the boards

TransmissionMode

Board GSM/UMTSMode

Port Port Capacity

ATM over E1/T1

WMPT UMTS 1 Four channels

UTRP3 UMTS 2 Eight channels

IP over E1/T1 GTMU/GTMUb

GSM 1 Four channels

WMPT UMTS 1 Four channels

UTRP4 UMTS 2 Eight channels

UTRPb4 LTE 2 Eight channels

TDM over E1/T1

GTMU/GTMUb

GSM 1 Four channels

UTRPb4 GSM 1 Four channels

Transmissionover FE/GEoptical cable

GTMU/GTMUb

GSM 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s

LMPT LTE 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

WMPT UMTS 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s

UTRP2 UMTS 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

BBU3900Hardware Description 4 Transmission Board Configurations

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

Page 72: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

TransmissionMode

Board GSM/UMTSMode

Port Port Capacity

Transmissionover FE/GEelectrical cable

GTMU/GTMUb

GSM 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s

LMPT LTE 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

WMPT UMTS 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s

UTRP9 UMTS 4 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s

NOTE

l The GTMU/GTMUb is mandatory for the GSM mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals aremore than four, the UTRPb4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission.

l The WMPT is mandatory for the UMTS mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals are more thanfour, the UTRP3 or UTRP4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission. When the transmissionrate for the FE optical cable is higher than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP2 must be configured. When thetransmission rate for the FE electrical cable is more than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP9 must be configured.

l The transmission over FE/GE optical cable is recommended for the LMPT.

4 Transmission Board ConfigurationsBBU3900

Hardware Description

4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 73: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

5 CPRI Port Configurations

About This Chapter

The CPRI port configurations involves the specifications and configuration principles of theCPRI ports on the BBU and RRU.

5.1 CPRI Port SpecificationsThe CPRI port specifications involves the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU.

5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTS Only Base StationWhen a base station works in UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP in the BBUthrough the CPRI ports.

5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM Only Base StationWhen a base station works in GSM mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb in theBBU through the CPRI ports.

5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/WBBPin the BBU through the CPRI ports.

5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO Base StationWhen a base station works in LO mode, the RRU is connected to the LBBP in the BBU throughthe CPRI ports.

5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL Base StationWhen a base station works in GL mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/LBBP in the BBUthrough the CPRI ports.

5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL Base StationWhen a base station works in UL mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP or LBBP in theBBU through the CPRI ports.

BBU3900Hardware Description 5 CPRI Port Configurations

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

Page 74: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

5.1 CPRI Port SpecificationsThe CPRI port specifications involves the CPRI ports on the BBU and RRU.

Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU

Table 5-1 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU.

Table 5-1 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the BBU

Board Number of CPRIPorts

TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort

Topology

GTMU 6 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

GTMUb 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

UBRI 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

WBBPa 3 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

WBBPb 3 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

WBBPd 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

LBBPb 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star or chain

LBBPc 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star or chain

Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU

Table 5-2 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU.

Table 5-2 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RRU

Module Number of CPRIPorts

TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort

Topology

RRU3004 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

RRU3008 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

RRU3801C 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

5 CPRI Port ConfigurationsBBU3900

Hardware Description

5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 75: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Module Number of CPRIPorts

TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort

Topology

RRU3804/RRU3801E

2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

RRU3808 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

RRU3908 V1 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring

RRU3908 V2 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star, chain, or ring

RRU3201 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star or chain

RRU3202 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s

Star or chain

5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the UMTSOnly Base Station

When a base station works in UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP in the BBUthrough the CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in UMTS only mode are divided into the RRU3804, RRU3801E,RRU3801C, RRU3805, and RRU3808. The following description is based on the RRU3804.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The RRU supports star and chain topologies.l The RRU with the data transmission rate of 1.25 Gbit/s over the CPRI ports supports a

maximum of four levels of cascading, and the RRU with the data transmission rate of 2.5Gbit/s over the CPRI ports supports a maximum of eight levels of cascading.

l The RRUs working in UMTS mode can be cascaded over the CPRI ports.l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the WBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected

to the lower-level RRU.l The CPRI ports on the WBBP are connected to the RRUs from CPRI0 in sequence, and

none of the ports is skipped.

Figure 5-1 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station workingin UMTS mode.

BBU3900Hardware Description 5 CPRI Port Configurations

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

Page 76: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 5-1 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSMOnly Base Station

When a base station works in GSM mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb in theBBU through the CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in GSM mode are divided into the RRU3008 and RRU3004.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The RRU supports star and chain topologies.l When cells are not shared, the RRU supports a maximum of six levels of cascading. When

cells are shared, the RRU supports a maximum of three levels of cascading.l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU/GTMUb, and the CPRI_E port

is connected to the lower-level RRU.l The RRUs working in GSM mode can be cascaded over the CPRI ports.

Figure 5-2 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station workingin GSM mode.

Figure 5-2 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5 CPRI Port ConfigurationsBBU3900

Hardware Description

5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 77: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports in the GSM+UMTS Base Station

When a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/WBBPin the BBU through the CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in GSM+UMTS mode are divided into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908V2.

Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default.

l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI_E port is connectedto the WBBP.

l If the CPRI ports on the GTMU are insufficient, the dual-star topology is achieved throughthe UBRI and WBBP.

Figure 5-3 shows the basic CPRI port connection principles of the RRU in a base station workingin GSM+UMTS mode.

Figure 5-3 Basic CPRI port connection principles

5.5 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the LO BaseStation

When a base station works in LO mode, the RRU is connected to the LBBP in the BBU throughthe CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in LO mode are divided into the RRU3201 and RRU3202. Thefollowing description is based on the RRU3201.

BBU3900Hardware Description 5 CPRI Port Configurations

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

Page 78: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connectionl The RRU supports the star topology.l The RRU supports a maximum of four levels of cascading.l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the LBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected

to the lower-level RRU.

Figure 5-4 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU ina base station working in LO mode.

Figure 5-4 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

5.6 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the GL BaseStation

When a base station works in GL mode, the RRU is connected to the GTMU/LBBP in the BBUthrough the CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in GL mode are divided into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908 V2.

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connectionl The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default.l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI_E port is connected

to the LBBP.

Figure 5-5 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU ina base station working in GL mode.

5 CPRI Port ConfigurationsBBU3900

Hardware Description

5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 79: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 5-5 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

5.7 Principles for Configuring the CPRI Ports in the UL BaseStation

When a base station works in UL mode, the RRU is connected to the WBBP or LBBP in theBBU through the CPRI ports.

NOTEThe RRUs in a base station working in UL mode can be classified into the RRU3908 V1 and RRU3908V2.

Basic Principles for Configuring the CPRI Port Connectionl The RRU supports the dual-star topology over the CPRI ports by default.l When the RRU works in dual-star topology, the signals in the same mode cannot be

transmitted over two CPRI links.l The CPRI_W port on the RRU is connected to the WBBP, and the CPRI_E port is connected

to the LBBP.

Figure 5-6 shows the basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection of the RRU ina base station working in UL mode.

Figure 5-6 Basic principles for configuring the CPRI port connection

BBU3900Hardware Description 5 CPRI Port Configurations

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

Page 80: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 81: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

About This Chapter

The DBS3900 monitoring system enables monitoring of all boards and components in thecabinet. If any board or component is faulty, an alarm is automatically reported. The UPEU andUEIU in the BBU or the RRU collects monitoring signals from boards and components toachieve environment monitoring of the DBS3900.

6.1 BBU Monitoring Port

6.2 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetsThe DBS3900 cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensorsand fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

6.3 Customized Alarm Input

BBU3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

Page 82: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

6.1 BBU Monitoring PortThe BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input portsand two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs. Figure6-1 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.

Figure 6-1 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU

Table 6-1 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU.

Table 6-1 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU

Slot Board Label Connector Quantity Description

Slot19 UPEU EXT-ALM0 RJ-45connector

1 Port forBooleaninputs 8 to 11

EXT-ALM1 RJ-45connector

1 Port forBooleaninputs 12 to15

MON0 RJ-45connector

1 Port forRS485 input0

MON1 RJ-45connector

1 Port forRS485 input1

Slot18 UEIU(optional)

EXT-ALM0 RJ-45connector

1 Port forBooleaninputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1 RJ-45connector

1 Port forBooleaninputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ-45connector

1 Port forRS485 input0

MON1 RJ-45connector

1 Port forRS485 input1

6 DBS3900 Monitoring SystemBBU3900

Hardware Description

6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 83: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

6.2 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetsThe DBS3900 cabinet is monitored by various boards. The boards collect alarms from sensorsand fans, and then transmit the alarm signals to the MON port on the BBU through the RS485serial bus. In this manner, the boards monitor the cabinet.

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power SupplyScenario

The monitoring board varies according to different cabinets. The monitoring boards in theAPM30 or TMC are the APMI, AFMU, and PMU. The monitoring boards in the APM30H(Ver.A) or TMC11H (Ver.A) are the HEUA, HPMI, and PMU. The monitoring boards in theAPM30H (Ver.B) or TMC1H (Ver.B) are the CMUA, HPMI, and PMU.

Figure 6-2 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30+1TMC+1 BBC or with additional 1 APM30+1 BBC when the BBU is installed in the APM30.The devices monitored by the APMI and AFMU are not shown in the figures. For details, seethe description about the boards.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the AFMU, see AFMU.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU isconfigured only in the APM30.

Figure 6-2 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30

APMI APMI

PMU AFMU

AFMU

BBC BBC

APM30 APM30

TMC

BBU

APMI

PMU AFMU

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

Door Status Sensor

APMI

PMU AFMU

AFMU

BBC

APM30

TMC

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COM

MON0 / MON1ALM0/ALM1

TX RX

RS422BBU

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU

Wiring terminal for the surge protection alarmsignal cable on the DCDU

APMI

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-3 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 BBC/IBBS when the BBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.A). The devices monitored by the HEUAand HPMI are not shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.

l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU isconfigured only in the APM30H (Ver.A).

BBU3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

Page 84: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 6-3 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.A)

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)

TMC11H(Ver.A)

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COMBAT

MON0 / MON1

PMU

RS422

BBU

HEUA

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)

TMC11H(Ver.A)

BBU

HEUA

HPMI

PMU HEUA

BBC/IBBS

APM30H(Ver.A)

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Door status sensor

Door status sensor

Door status sensor

Figure 6-4 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 IBBS when theBBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI arenot shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is

configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 6-4 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B)

CMUA

PMU

HPMI

CMUA

IBBS

APM30H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COM_485

COMPMU

MON0 / MON1

COM_INBBU

CMUA CMUA

PMU CMUA

IBBS

APM30H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

BBU

CMUA CMUA

PMU CMUA

IBBS

APM30H(Ver.B)

HPMI HPMI

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-5 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with 1 APM30H(Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS or with additional 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+2 IBBS when theBBU is installed in the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI arenot shown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is

configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).

6 DBS3900 Monitoring SystemBBU3900

Hardware Description

6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 85: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 6-5 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B)

PMU

HPMI

CMUA

APM30H(Ver.B)TMC11H(Ver.B)

COM_IN / COM1

COM_OUT / COM2

COM_485

COMPMU

MON0 / MON1

COM_INBBU

CMUA

CMUA

IBBSIBBS

CMUA

PMU

HPMI

CMUA

APM30H(Ver.B)TMC11H(Ver.B)

BBU

CMUA

CMUA

IBBSIBBS

CMUA

PMU

HPMI

CMUA

APM30H(Ver.B)

CMUA

IBBS IBBS

CMUA

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-6 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered andmonitored by the APM30H (Ver.B). The devices monitored by the CMUA and HPMI are notshown in the figures. For details, see the description about the boards.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HPMI, see HPMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is

configured only in the APM30H (Ver.B).

Figure 6-6 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the RRU is powered and monitored bythe APM30H (Ver.B)

CMUA

PMU

SLPU

HPMI RRU

CMUA

IBBS

APM30H(Ver.B)

IBBS

COM_IN / COM1COM_OUT / COM2COM_485

COMALM

PMUIN0OUT1

MON0 / MON1COM_IN

CMUA

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-7 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed inthe OMB. The devices monitored by the HEUA is not shown in the figures. For details, see thedescription about the boards.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

Figure 6-7 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB

COM_IN / COM1

MON0 / MON1Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

OMB

BBU

PMU

HEUA

BBU3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

Page 86: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 6-8 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR and also in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario. In this solution, theBBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the PMU, see PMU. The PMU is

configured only in the lower IMB03.

Figure 6-8 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (110V/220V)scenario

COM_IN / COM1

IMB03

IMB03

MON0 / MON1BBU

PMU

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-9 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR and also in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario. In this solution, theBBU is installed in the IMB03, and the RRUs are installed remotely.

Figure 6-9 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+IMB03 (110V/220V)scenario

RS232/RS485

IMB03

MON0 / MON1 BBU

PMU

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the -48 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-10 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 configured with two TMCsor TMC11Hs when the BBU is installed in the TMC or TMC11H.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the APMI, see APMI.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.

Figure 6-10 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the TMC orTMC11H

APMI/HEUA/CMUA

TMC/TMC11H TMC/TMC11H

COM_IN / COM1

MON0 / MON1

BBU

APMI/HEUA/CMUA

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

Figure 6-11 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed inthe OMB. The devices monitored by the HEUA is not shown in the figures. For details, see thedescription about the boards.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the HEUA, see HEUA.

6 DBS3900 Monitoring SystemBBU3900

Hardware Description

6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 87: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 6-11 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the OMB

COM_IN / COM1

MON0 / MON1Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

OMB

BBU

HEUA

Monitoring Principles of the DBS3900 in the +24 V DC Power Supply Scenario

Figure 6-12 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed inthe APM30H (Ver.B) in the +24 V DC power supply scenario.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the CMUA, see CMUA.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see

Power Subrack (DC/DC).

Figure 6-12 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 when the BBU is installed in the APM30H(Ver.B) in the +24 DC power supply scenario

ALM

PRESENT

COM_IN APM30H(+24V,Ver.B)

EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1MON0 / MON1

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

BBU

CMUA

Power System(DC/DC)

Figure 6-13 illustrates the monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the indoor solution of BBU+RRU+ICR and also in the +24 V DC power supply scenario. In this solution, the BBU isinstalled in the IMB03, and the RRU is installed on the IFS06.l For details about the functions of monitoring ports on the power equipment (DC/DC), see

Power Subrack (DC/DC).

Figure 6-13 Monitoring principles of the DBS3900 in the BBU+RRU+ICR (+24 V DC) scenarioALM

PRESENT

IMB03

IMB03

EXT-ALM0 / EXT-ALM1BBU

Power System(DC/DC)

Cable to beconnected on siteCable connected before deliveryMonitoring from source to destination

For details about the monitoring of the EMUA, see 6.3 Customized Alarm Input.

For details about the connections of all monitoring signal cables in the cabinet, see 8.4Monitoring Signal Cable Connections.

6.3 Customized Alarm InputIf a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported tothe BBU in the following two modes:l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.l The alarms are collected by the EMUA. For details about software configurations, see the

related initial configuration guide.

BBU3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

Page 88: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Monitoring Board ConfigurationIf a BBU monitors customer devices, customized alarms about the devices must be reported tothe BBU. The configurations of monitoring boards in the BTS3900A depend on the number ofcustomized alarms, as listed in Table 6-2.

Table 6-2 Configurations of monitoring boards in the DBS3900

External PowerInput

ApplicationScenario

Number ofBoolean Signals tobe Monitored

Monitoring BoardConfiguration

-48 V DC/220 V AC Indoor DBS3900 None UPEU

1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU

17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMUA

Outdoor DBS3900 None UPEU

1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU+(2xUSLP2+SLPU)

17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMUA

NOTE

l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured.l The analog values can be monitored only by the EMUA.l Two USLP2s and one SLPU are delivered in a package.l The EMUA with sensors is configured according to site requirements for the indoor DBS3900.

Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIUEach UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of twoUPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU, which means there are 16 Booleanalarm inputs. This method can be used for the configuration of less than 16 customized alarminputs.

If using this method, connect the device to be monitored to the SLPU for surge protection, andthen connect the device to the EXT_ALM port on the BBU, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU

6 DBS3900 Monitoring SystemBBU3900

Hardware Description

6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 89: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Customized alarm signals are transmitted to the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 in the SLPUand then transferred to the EXT_ALM port on the UPEU or EUIU through the alarm cable forthe BBU. Table 6-3 describes the relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports and the number ofcustomized alarms.

Table 6-3 Relationship between the IN0 to IN3 ports on the USLP2 and the number ofcustomized alarms

Pins oftheIN0 toIN3ports

USLP2 in the upper slot USLP2 in the lower slot

IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3

1 4+ 5+ 0+ 1+ 12+ 13+ 8+ 9+

2 4-(GND)

5-(GND)

0-(GND)

1-(GND)

12-(GND)

13-(GND)

8-(GND)

9-(GND)

3 6-(GND)

7+ 2-(GND)

3+ 14-(GND)

15+ 10-(GND)

11+

4 6+ 7-(GND)

2+ 3-(GND)

14+ 15-(GND)

10+ 11-(GND)

For details about ports on the USLP2, see 10.6.4 USLP2. For details about the wire sequenceof the BBU alarm cable, see 9.19 BBU Alarm Cable.

NOTEThe SLPU is configured with two USLP2s by default before delivery when it is used as an alarm signalprotection unit. If a BBU is configured with one UPEU, the UPEU must be installed only in the lower slot.In this case, the USLP2 in the upper slot of the SLPU is not used.

Customized Alarms Collected by the EMUAThe EMUA can be configured for the DBS3900 that requires more than 16 Boolean alarmsignals. Each EMUA supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs.

Customized alarms are transmitted to the EMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMUreports the alarms to the CMUA, which transfers the alarms to the BBU through the MON port.For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (1)

SENSOR

BBU3900Hardware Description 6 DBS3900 Monitoring System

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

Page 90: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

If the CPRI port on the RRU is not used to report alarms to the BBU, the serial port on the RRUis used to report alarms to the CMUA that connects to the PMU. Then, the PMU transfers thealarms to the EMUA. For details about cable connections, see Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 Customized alarms collected by the EMUA (2)

COM_IN

ALM

COM_IN

RS485

COM_OUT

COM_OUT

PMU

RRU

CMUA

EMUA

SENSOR

For details about the position of the input port on the EMUA and cable connection between theEMUA and the sensor, see EMUA User Guide.

6 DBS3900 Monitoring SystemBBU3900

Hardware Description

6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 91: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

7 BBU3900 Equipment

About This Chapter

This describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.

The BBU3900 has the following functions:

l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNCl Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modulesl Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB

disk to be used for software installation and data configurationl Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000l Processes uplink and downlink datal Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processingl Provides the system clock

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.

7.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

Page 92: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

7.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.

The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 7-1shows the BBU3900.

Figure 7-1 BBU3900

The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, andis used during the commissioning of the base station.l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting

ears of the BBU. Figure 7-2 shows the position of the ESN.

Figure 7-2 The position of the ESN (1)

l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting earsof the BBU. Figure 7-3 shows the position of the ESN.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 93: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 7-3 The position of the ESN (2)

7.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.

7.2.1 WMPTThe WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes thesignals and manages the resources for other boards.

7.2.2 GTMUThe GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basictransmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenanceport, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and managesthe entire base station.

7.2.3 LMPTThe LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) is the main control and transmissionunit of the BBU3900. It manages the entire eNodeB in terms of OM and signaling processingand provides clock signals for the BBU3900.

7.2.4 WBBPThe WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) of the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

7.2.5 LBBPThe LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.

7.2.6 FANThe FAN unit of the BBU3900 controls the fan speed, monitors the temperature of the FANunit, and dissipates the heat in the BBU.

7.2.7 UPEUThe Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) is a mandatory board of theBBU3900. It converts -48 V or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power.

7.2.8 UEIUThe Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals fromthe external devices to the main control and transmission unit.

7.2.9 UTRP

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

Page 94: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

This describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmissionextension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.

7.2.10 USCUThis section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).

7.2.11 UBRIThe Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.

7.2.1 WMPTThe WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes thesignals and manages the resources for other boards.

PanelFigure 7-4 shows the panel of the WMPT.

Figure 7-4 Panel of the WMPT

FunctionsThe WMPT has the following functions:

l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management,equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000)

l Provides the reference clockl Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900l Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB

disk is inserted during software installation and data configurationl Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocolsl Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol

LEDsTable 7-1 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 95: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-1 LEDs on the WMPT panel

Label Color Status Meaning

RUN Green ON The power input isavailable, but theboard is faulty.

OFF The power supply isunavailable.

1s ON and 1s OFF The board in normalconfiguration isrunning properly.

0.125s ON and0.125s OFF

The software is beingloaded to the board,or the board is not inuse.

ALM Red OFF No alarm isgenerated.

ON The board has alarmson hardware.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is instandby mode.

In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating theconnection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port.The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 7-5shows the LEDs beside the three ports.

Figure 7-5 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT

Table 7-2 describes the LEDs and their status.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

Page 96: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-2 LEDs and their status

LED Color Status Meaning

LEDs beside the FE1optical port

Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.

OFF The connections arefaulty.

Green (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.

OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.

LEDs beside the FE0electrical port

Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.

OFF The connections arefaulty.

Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.

OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.

ETH Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.

OFF The connections arefaulty.

Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.

OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.

Ports

Table 7-3 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.

Table 7-3 Ports on the WMPT panel

Label Connector Type Description

E1/T1 DB26 connector E1

FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port

FE1 SFP female FE optical port

GPS SMA connector Obligate

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 97: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Connector Type Description

ETH RJ45 connector Commissioning Ethernetport

USB USB connector USB loading port

TST USB connector USB testing port

RST - Resetting the BBU

DIP Switches

The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for settingthe protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 7-6 shows theDIP switches on the WMPT.

Figure 7-6 DIP switches on the WMPT

Table 7-4 and Table 7-5 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2.

Table 7-4 Settings of SW1

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1 Mode

OFF OFF ON ON The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

Page 98: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

Table 7-5 Settings of SW2

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode

ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

CAUTIONAll the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you shouldset all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.

7.2.2 GTMUThe GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basictransmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenanceport, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and managesthe entire base station.

PanelThe GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 7-7 and Figure 7-8 showthe panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.

Figure 7-7 GTMU panel

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 99: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 7-8 GTMUb panel

NOTEThe GTMU hereinafter mentioned in this document is the first type.

FunctionsThe GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions:

l Controls and manages the base stationl Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performance

management system, and security management systeml Monitors the fans and power modulesl Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized model Provides the clock output for testl Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM systeml Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEsl Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUsl The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs.l Four IDX2 ports on the backplane of the GTMUb can achieve the function of baseband

resource pool backup.

LEDsTable 7-6 describes the LEDs on the GTMU.

Table 7-6 LEDs on the GTMU

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON The board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is running properly.

ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s

The board is being tested.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

Page 100: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

Software is being loaded to theboard.

ALM Red ON An alarm is generated,indicating a running fault.

OFF The board is running properly.

ACT Green ON The board is in the active state.

OFF The board is in the standby state.

Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FEoptical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs ispositioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 7-7 describesthe LEDs and their status.

Table 7-7 LEDs and their status

LED Color Status Description

LIU0 to LIU3 Green ON The link is in the idlestate.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

An E1/T1 remotealarm is generated.

OFF The link isfunctional.

CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green ON The CPRI link isfunctional.

Red ON The optical modulefails to receivesignals.

ETH Green (LINK LEDon the left)

ON The connection is setup successfully.

OFF No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT LEDon the right)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

OFF No data is beingtransmitted.

FE0 Green (LINK LEDon the left)

ON The connection is setup successfully.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 101: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

LED Color Status Description

OFF No connection is setup.

Orange (ACT LEDon the right)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

OFF No data is beingtransmitted.

FE1(GTMUb) Green (LINK LEDon the left)

ON The connection is setup successfully.

OFF No connection is setup.

Green (ACT LED onthe right)

Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.

OFF No data is beingtransmitted.

M_S (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.

EXT (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.

PortsTable 7-8 describes the ports on the GTMU.

Table 7-8 Ports on the GTMU

Label Connector Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU.It supports the input and output of optical andelectrical transmission signals

EXT (GTMUb) SFP female Obligate

ETH RJ-45 connector Local maintenance and debugging port

FE0 RJ-45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough FE cables to transmit networkinformation

FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough optical cables to transmit networkinformation

USB USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through theUSB disk

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

Page 102: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Connector Description

TST USB connector Provides a reference clock for the tester

E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector

Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs betweenthe GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs

The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.

DIP SwitchesOn the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 andS2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:

l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 7-9 provides details on the DIP switch.l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 7-10 provides details on

the DIP switch.l S3 is reserved.l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 7-11 provides details on the DIP switch.l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 7-12 provides details

on the DIP switch.

Table 7-9 Details of the DIP Switch S1

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to75 ohm.

OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to120 ohm.

ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohm.

Others Unavailable

NOTE

Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept the out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 103: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-10 Details of the DIP Switch S2

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF By default, all the DIPbits of S2 are set to OFFin all the modes.

ON ON ON ON When the four E1 RXlinks in 75 ohm haveerrors, all the bits of S2must be set to ON torectify the faults on theE1 links.

Others Unavailable

Table 7-11 Details of the DIP Switch S4

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass

OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1bypass

Others Unavailable

Table 7-12 Details of the DIP Switch S5

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1bypass

OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-1 cascadedbase stations

ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-2 cascadedbase stations

OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-3 cascadedbase stations

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

Page 104: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-4 cascadedbase stations

OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-5 cascadedbase stations

NOTE

The E1 bypass function is not supported in this version. All the bits of S4 should be set to OFF, and all thebits of S5 should be set to ON.

7.2.3 LMPTThe LTE Main Processing & Transmission Unit (LMPT) is the main control and transmissionunit of the BBU3900. It manages the entire eNodeB in terms of OM and signaling processingand provides clock signals for the BBU3900.

Panel

Figure 7-9 shows the panel of the LMPT.

Figure 7-9 Panel of the LMPT

TX

SFP 0

RX TX

SFP 1

RX

USB TST ETH FE/GE0 FE/GE1GPSRST

RUNALMACT

LMPT

LMPTb

Functions

The LMPT performs the following functions:

l Performs configuration management, equipment management, performance monitoring,signal processing, and radio resource management.

l Controls all boards in the system.

l Provides the system clock.

l Processes signals between the eNodeB and the MME/S-GW.

LEDs

The LMPT provides three LEDs on the panel. Table 7-13 describes the LEDs.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 105: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-13 LEDs on the LMPT

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, andthe board is faulty.

Off There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.

On for 1s and offfor 1s

The board works properly.

On for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s

Software is being loaded tothe board.

ALM Red On The board is reportingalarms.

Off No alarm is generated.

ACT Green On The board is in active mode.

Off The board is in standbymode.

Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FEoptical port, FE electrical port, and serial Ethernet port for commissioning. Each of the LEDs ispositioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 7-14 describesthe LEDs and their status.

Table 7-14 LEDs and their status

LED Color Status Description

SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) On The connection issuccessful.

Off There is noconnection.

Orange (ACT) Blinking The port is receivingor transmittingsignals.

Off The port is notreceiving ortransmitting signals.

ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking The port is receivingor transmittingsignals.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

Page 106: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

LED Color Status Description

Off The port is notreceiving ortransmitting signals.

Green (LINK) On The connection issuccessful.

Off There is noconnection.

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1 Green (LINK) On The connection issuccessful.

Off There is noconnection.

Orange (ACT) Blinking The port is receivingor transmittingsignals.

Off The port is notreceiving ortransmitting signals.

Ports

Table 7-15 describes the ports on the LMPT.

Table 7-15 Ports on the LMPT

Label Connector Type Quantity Function

SFP0 and SFP1 LC 2 Ethernet optical ports,which are connected tothe transmissiondevice or gateway

USB USB 1 Loads software to theboard

TST USB 1 Tests

ETH RJ-45 1 Used forcommissioning

FE/GE0 and FE/GE1

RJ-45 2 Ethernet electricalports, which areconnected to thetransmission device orgateway

GPS SMA 1 Receives GPS signals

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 107: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Connector Type Quantity Function

RST - 1 Resets the BBU3900

NOTE

The ports labeled SFP0 and FE/GE0 on the LMPT are for only one GE transmission line, and the two portscannot be used at the same time.

The ports labeled SFP1 and FE/GE1 on the LMPT are for another GE transmission line, and the two portscannot be used at the same time.

7.2.4 WBBPThe WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) of the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.

PanelsThe WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 7-10, Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-10 Panel of the WBBPa

Figure 7-11 Panel of the WBBPb

Figure 7-12 Panel of the WBBPd

FunctionsThe WBBP has the following functions:l Provides the CPRI interface for communication between the BBU and the RRU or RFU,

and supports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode.l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

Page 108: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l When installed in slot 2 or slot 3, the WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data.

Table 7-16 describes the specifications of the WBBP.

Table 7-16 Specifications of the WBBP

Board Number of Cells UL CE Number DL CE Number

WBBPa 3 128 256

WBBPb1 3 64 64

WBBPb2 3 128 128

WBBPb3 6 256 256

WBBPb4 6 384 384

WBBPd1 6 192 192

WBBPd2 6 384 384

WBBPd3 6 256 256

LEDsThe WBBPa and WBBPb provide three LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links, and theLEDs are positioned below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the statusof the SFP links, and the LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports.

Table 7-17 describes the LEDs on the WBBP and their status.

Table 7-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green ON The board has power input, yetthe board is faulty.

OFF The power supply or the boardis faulty.

Blinking (on for one secondand off for one second)

The board is running properly.

Blinking (on for 0.125 secondand off for 0.125 second)

Software is being loaded to theboard.

ACT Green ON The board is running properly.

OFF The WBBP is not in use.

ALM Red OFF The board is running properly.

ON The board has hardware alarms.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 109: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDsare positioned below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the status of theSFP links. The LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports.

Table 7-18 describes the LEDs.

Table 7-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links

Label Color Status Description

TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link isavailable.

Steady red The optical modulefails to receivesignals.

Blinking red (ON for0.125 second andOFF for 0.125second)

The RRU on theCPRI link is faulty.

Blinking red (ON forone second and OFFfor one second)

The CPRI link is outof lock.

OFF The SFP module isnot in position or theoptical module ispowered off.

PortsTable 7-19 describes the three CPRI ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb.

Table 7-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb

Label Connector Type Description

CPRIx SFP female Data transmission portbetween the BBU and the RFmodule, supporting input andoutput of optical andelectrical signals

The WBBPd has six ports. Table 7-20 describes the ports on the WBBPd.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

Page 110: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-20 Ports on the WBBPd

Label Connector Type Description

CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,CPRI5/EIH2

SFP Data transmission portbetween the BBU and the RFmodule, supporting input andoutput of optical andelectrical signals

NOTEThe six CPRI ports are available on the WBBPd configured only in slot 2 or 3, and the CPRI ports are notavailable on the WBBPd configured in other port.

7.2.5 LBBPThe LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.

PanelThe LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 7-13 and Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-13 Panel of the LBBP

CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT

LBBPb

Figure 7-14 Panel of the LBBP

CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT

LBBPc

FunctionThe LBBP has the following functions:l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signalsl Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules

Table 7-21 describes the specifications of the LBBP.

Table 7-21 Specifications of the LBBP

Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell

AntennaConfiguration

LBBPb 3 10M 2T2R

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 111: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell

AntennaConfiguration

1 20M 2T2R

1 10M 4T4R

LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R

6 10M 2T2R

1 20M 4T4R

LEDThere are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 7-22 describes the LEDs on the LBBP.

Table 7-22 LEDs on the LBBP

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is powersupply, and the boardis faulty.

Off There is no powersupply, or the boardis faulty.

On for 1s and off for1s

The board is runningproperly.

On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

Data is being loadedto the board, or theboard is not started.

ALM Red On An alarm is reported,indicating a fault inthe board.

Off The board is normal.

ACT Green On The board works inactive mode.

Off The board works instandby mode.

The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positionedabove the SFP ports. Table 7-23 describes the LEDs.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-21

Page 112: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-23 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links

Label Color Status Description

TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link isavailable.

Steady red The optical modulefails to receivesignals.

Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

The RRU on the CPRIlink is faulty.

Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)

The CPRI link is outof lock (Clocksynchronization is notachieved for the CPRIsignals).

Off The SFP module is notin position or theoptical module ispowered off.

PortTable 7-24 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP.

Table 7-24 Ports on the LBBP

Label Connector Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 The CPRI portsconnect to theLRRUs or LRFUsfor transmittingservice data, clocksignals, andsynchronizationinformation

7.2.6 FANThe FAN unit of the BBU3900 controls the fan speed, monitors the temperature of the FANunit, and dissipates the heat in the BBU.

PanelFigure 7-15 shows the panel of the FAN unit.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 113: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 7-15 Panel of the FAN unit

FunctionsThe FAN unit performs the following functions:l Controls the fan speed.l Reports the fan status to the main control board.l Monitors the temperature of the air inlets.l Dissipates the heat.

LEDsThe FAN unit has one LED, indicating the running status of the module. Table 7-25 describesthe LED on the FAN unit and its status.

Table 7-25 LED on the FAN unit and its status

Label Color Status Description

STATE Green On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s

The module is notregistered, and noalarm is reported.

On for 1s and off for1s

The module isrunning properly.

Red Off No alarm is reported.

On for 1s and off for1s

The module isreporting alarms.

7.2.7 UPEUThe Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) is a mandatory board of theBBU3900. It converts -48 V or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-23

Page 114: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

PanelsThe UPEU is classified into the Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type A(UPEUA) and the Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type B (UPEUB). TheUPEUA converts -48 V DC power to +12 V DC power and the UPEUB converts +24 V DCpower to +12 V DC power. Figure 7-16 shows the UPEUA panel and Figure 7-17 shows theUPEUB panel.

Figure 7-16 Panel of the UPEUA

(1) Power switch of the BBU

Figure 7-17 Panel of the UPEUB

(1) Power switch of the BBU

FunctionsThe UPEU performs the following functions:l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power to +12 V DC power that is applicable to the boardsl Provides two ports for two RS485 inputs and two ports for eight Boolean signalsl Provides reverse connection protection for power cable connectorsl If two UPEUs are configured, two power inputs are required. The UPEU in slot 19 works

in active mode, and the UPEU in slot 18 works in standby mode

LEDsThe UPEU has one LED that indicates the operating status of the board. Table 7-26 describesthe LED and its status.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 115: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-26 LED on the UPEU and its status

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green On The UPEU isoperational.

Off Input power isunavailable or theboard is faulty.

Ports

The UPEU provides two RS485 ports and two ports for eight Boolean signals. When configuredin different slots, the ports on the UPEU have different functions. Figure 7-18 shows the slotsin the BBU.

Figure 7-18 Slots in the BBU

Table 7-27 describes the ports on the panel of the UPEU.

Table 7-27 Ports on the panel of the UPEU

Slot Label Connector

Quantity Description

Slot 19 PWR 3V3 1 Port for +24 V DC or -48 V DC inputpower

EXT-ALM0

RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3

EXT-ALM1

RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 0

MON1 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 1

Slot 18 PWR 3V3 1 Port for +24 V DC or -48 V DC inputpower

EXT-ALM0

RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 0 to 3

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-25

Page 116: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Slot Label Connector

Quantity Description

EXT-ALM1

RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean signal inputs 4 to 7

MON0 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 0

MON1 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 signal input 1

7.2.8 UEIUThe Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals fromthe external devices to the main control and transmission unit.

PanelFigure 7-19 shows the panel of the UEIU.

Figure 7-19 Panel of the UEIU

FunctionsThe UEIU performs the following functions:l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal.l Provides two ports, each transmitting four boolean signals.l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control

and transmission unit.

PortsThe UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals.

Table 7-28 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 117: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-28 Ports on the panel of the UEIU

Slot Label Connector

Quantity

Description

slot 18 EXT-ALM0

RJ-45 1 No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports

EXT-ALM1

RJ-45 1 No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports

MON0 RJ-45 1 No.0 RS485 signal input port

MON1 RJ-45 1 No.1 RS485 signal input port

7.2.9 UTRPThis describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmissionextension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.

Specification

Table 7-29 describes the specifications of the UTRP.

Table 7-29 Specifications of the UTRP

Board Sub-board/Board Type Port

UTRP2 UEOC Two universal FE/GE opticalport

UTRP3 UAEC Ports for eight channels ofATM over E1/T1

UTRP4 UIEC Ports for eight channels of IPover E1/T1

UTRPb4 - Ports for eight channels ofTDM over E1/T1

UTRP6 UUAS Port for one unchannelizedSTM-1/OC-3

UTRP9 UQEC Four universal FE/GEelectrical ports

Panels

Figure 7-20 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-27

Page 118: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 7-20 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports

Figure 7-21 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.

Figure 7-21 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1sRUNALMACT

E1/T1(0-3)

UTRP

E1/T1(4-7)

Figure 7-22 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.

Figure 7-22 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1

Figure 7-23 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.

Figure 7-23 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports

FunctionsThe UTRP has the following functions:

l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of theMAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address.

l The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexingon a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links.

l The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates andcontrols the 256 HDLC timeslot channels.

l The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode andprovides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dual-mode base station.

l The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port.l The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs the

functions of the MAC layer and physical layer.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 119: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l The cold backup is supported.

LEDsTable 7-30 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP.

Table 7-30 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP

Label Color Status Description

RUN Green ON The board has powerinput, but the board isfaulty.

OFF The board has nopower input, or theboard is faulty.

ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board is runningproperly.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board is notconfigured or isloading software.

ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s

The board is in theoffline state or undertest.

ALM Red ON or blinkingrapidly

The board isreporting alarms.

OFF The board is runningproperly.

ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s

The board isreporting a minoralarm.

ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s

The board isreporting a majoralarm.

ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s

The board isreporting a criticalalarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is instandby mode.

UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table7-31 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-29

Page 120: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-31 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9

Label Color Status Description

LINK Green OFF The link isdisconnected.

ON The link is properlyconnected.

ACT Orange Blinking The link is receivingor transmitting data.

OFF The link is notreceiving ortransmitting data.

PortsTable 7-32 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.

Table 7-32 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports

Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP connector

Table 7-33 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.

Table 7-33 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s

Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 connector

Table 7-34 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.

Table 7-34 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1

Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 port 1 SFP connector

Table 7-35 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 121: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-35 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports

Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type

FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ-45 connector

DIP Switches

There is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.

The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matchedimpedance for the eight E1s. Figure 7-24 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4,Figure 7-25 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4.

Figure 7-24 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4

Figure 7-25 DIP switch on the UTRPb4

Table 7-36, Table 7-37, and Table 7-38 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-31

Page 122: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-36 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode

ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

Table 7-37 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode

ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

CAUTIONSW1 and SW2 are set to OFF (balanced mode) by default. When the eight E1s are faulty, all theDIP bits of SW1 and SW2 should be set to ON to rectify faults. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4to No.7 and SW2 corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.

Table 7-38 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1 Mode

ON ON OFF OFF The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 123: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

DIPSwitch

DIP Status Description

1 2 3 4

ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.

Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled

7.2.10 USCUThis section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).

PanelThere are two types of USCU: USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 7-26 and Figure7-27.

Figure 7-26 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U)

Figure 7-27 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)

(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port

FunctionsThe USCU has the following functions:

l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of theoperator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input.

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-33

Page 124: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtainingaccurate clock signals from transmission devices.

l The USCUb2 has the GPS/GLONASS receiver.

LEDTable 7-39 and Table 7-40 describe the LEDs on the USCU.

Table 7-39 LEDs on the USCU

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green On There is power supply, and theboard is faulty.

Off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.

Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)

The board is running properly.

Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)

Software is being loaded to theboard, or the board is notconfigured.

ALM Red Off The board is running properly,and no alarm is generated.

On An alarm is generated, and theboard needs to be replaced.

Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)

An alarm is generated. Thealarm may be caused due tofaults in the related boards orports. Therefore, whether theboard needs to be replacedcannot be determined.

ACT Green On The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is enabled.

Off The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is disabled.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 125: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 7-40 LEDs on the TOD port

Color Meaning Default Configuration

Green On: The TOD port isconfigured as the inputport.

The green LED of the TOD0 port is off,and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port ison.

Yellow Off: The TOD port isconfigured as the outputport.

The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off,and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.

PortsTable 7-41 describes the ports on the USCU.

Table 7-41 Ports on the USCU

Port Connector Description

GPS port SMA coaxialconnector

Receives GPS signals

RGPS port PCB weldedwiring terminal

Receives RGPS signals

TOD0 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals

TOD1 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, andreceives TOD signals from the M1000

BITS port SMA coaxialconnector

Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptiveinput of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock referencesource

M-1PPS port SMA coaxialconnector

Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000

7.2.11 UBRIThe Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.

PanelFigure 7-28 shows the panel of the UBRI.

Figure 7-28 Panel of the UBRI

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-35

Page 126: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Functions

The UBRI performs the following functions:

l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical ports

l Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI

LEDs

Table 7-42 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.

Table 7-42 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI

LED Color State Description

RUN Green ON steady There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF steady There is no powersupply, or the boardis in the alarm status.

1s ON, 1s OFF The board worksproperly.

0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF

The board is loadingsoftware.

ALM Red ON or blinking at ahigh frequency

The board is in thealarm status.

OFF steady No alarm isgenerated.

ACT Green ON steady The board worksproperly.

OFF steady The board is notworking.

The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFPports. Table 7-43 describes the CPRI link status LED.

Table 7-43 CPRI link status LED

Label Color State Description

CPRIx Red/Green ON (green) The CPRI link isavailable.

7 BBU3900 EquipmentBBU3900

Hardware Description

7-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 127: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Color State Description

ON (red) The optical modulefails to receivesignals.

0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF (Red)

The RRU on the CPRIlink is faulty.

1s ON, 1s OFF (red) The CPRI link is outof lock.

PortsTable 7-44 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI.

Table 7-44 Ports on the panel of the UBRI

Label Connector Port Quantity Description

CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 Connecting the BBUand the RF module

BBU3900Hardware Description 7 BBU3900 Equipment

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-37

Page 128: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 129: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

About This Chapter

The connections of the CPRI cables, transmission cables, and monitoring signal cables of theDBS3900 vary according to the external input power and combinations of the cabinet configuredin the DBS3900.

8.1 Power Cable ConnectionsTo meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei providesa series of power equipment such as the PDU, EPS, and PSU. The power equipment converts110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC and provides power to customer equipment.

8.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900and outdoor DBS3900.

8.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of theDBS3900.

8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThe monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 VAC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

Page 130: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.1 Power Cable ConnectionsTo meet the requirements of 110 V AC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power inputs, Huawei providesa series of power equipment such as the PDU, EPS, and PSU. The power equipment converts110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC and provides power to customer equipment.

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply Scenario

When the input power is 110 V AC/220 V AC power, a distributed base station is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC. The APM30 is configured with the PDU, whichconverts 110 V AC/220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU,RRU, and TMC. Figure 8-1 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Table 8-1 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-1 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the Power Cabinet

P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 131: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet

P6 and P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film

P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1BBC, the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220 V ACpower into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver. A).Figure 8-2 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Table 8-2 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-2 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30H PowerCabinet

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

Page 132: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P2 and P5 Power cable for the fan box

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 Input Power Cable of the TMC11H

P6 and P8 Input Power Cable of the Heating Film

P7 Input Power Cable of the Heater

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1IBBS200T, the APM30H (Ver. A) is configured with the PDU, which converts 110 V AC/220V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.A). Figure 8-3 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-3 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-3 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 133: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P2 and P5 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P6 and P7 Power Cables for the Batteries

When a base station is in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1IBBS200D, the APM30H (Ver. B) is configured with the EPS, which converts 110 V AC/220V AC power into -48 V DC power and provides power to the BBU, RRU and TMC11H (Ver.B). Figure 8-4 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D

Table 8-4 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-4 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

P2 and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

Page 134: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Batteries

P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P7 RRU Power Cable

P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P9 Power cable for the heating film

Figure 8-5 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T.

Figure 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-5 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-5 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 135: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P2 and P10 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler

P6 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P7 RRU Power Cable

P8 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

Figure 8-6 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D.

Figure 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D

Table 8-6 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-6 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 and P10 Power cable for the junction box

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

Page 136: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

P2, P6, and P12 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the Fans in the IBBS200D

P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P8 RRU Power Cable

P9 Power cable for the heating film

P11 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P13 and P14 Power Cables for the Batteries

Figure 8-7 shows the power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T.

Figure 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T

Table 8-7 describes the power cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 137: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-7 Power cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1 APM30H (Ver.B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 and P9 Power cable for the junction box

P2, P6, and P11 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the APM30H

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

P4 and P5 Power Cables for the TEC Cooler

P7 Input Power Cables for the APM30H

P8 RRU Power Cable

P10 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P12 and P13 Power Cables for the Batteries

Power Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power Supply ScenarioWhen the input power is -48 V DC, a distributed base station is configured with two TMCs. TheTMCs are configured with the DCDU-03Bs, which provide power to the BBU and RRU ortransmission equipment. Figure 8-8 describes the power cable connections.

Figure 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 8-8 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-8 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet

P2 Power cable for the fan box

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

Page 138: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

When two TMC11Hs (Ver. A) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver. A) providespower to the BBU and RRU. Figure 8-9 shows the power cable connections.

Figure 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Table 8-9 describes the power cable connections.

Table 8-9 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable of the APM30Transmission Cabinet

P2 Power cable for the fan box

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

When two TMC11Hs (Ver. B) are configured, the DCDU-03B in the TMC11H (Ver. B) providespower to the BBU and RRU. Figure 8-10 describes the power cable connections.

Figure 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Table 8-10 describes the power cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 139: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-10 Power cable connections of a base station configured with two TMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Cable Number Cable Description

P1 Input Power Cable for the TMC11H

P2 Power Cable for the Fan Box in the TMC11H

P3 9.3 BBU Power Cable

8.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe transmission cable connections vary according the working modes of the indoor DBS3900and outdoor DBS3900.

8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM Only Base StationIn a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable canbe used for data transmission.

8.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM Only Base StationIn a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

8.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS Only Base StationIn a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

8.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS Only Base StationIn a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

8.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE Only Base StationIn an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.

8.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only Base StationIn an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.

8.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeWhen a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used.

8.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeWhen a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used.

8.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-11

Page 140: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

8.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in RouteBackup Transmission ModeA GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU andWMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC.

8.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in RouteBackup Transmission ModeA GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU andWMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC.

8.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeIn a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FEports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

8.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeIn a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FEports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

8.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

8.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

8.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTE Base Station in RouteBackup Transmission ModeA GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection betweenthe FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPTpanels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, andthe FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTE Base Station in Route BackupTransmission ModeA GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection betweenthe FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 141: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPTpanels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, andthe FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeIn a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting theFE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT orthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

8.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission ModeIn a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting theFE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT orthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

8.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

8.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission ModeWhen a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in RouteBackup Transmission ModeA UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in Route BackupTransmission ModeA UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in HybridTransmission ModeA UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, hybridtransmission can be implemented. That is, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port are usedas shared ports for data transmission. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with highQoS requirements, such as CS services. The FE/GE port is used to transmit the services withlow QoS requirements, such as PS services.

8.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTE Base Station in HybridTransmission ModeA UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-13

Page 142: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

8.2.1 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM OnlyBase Station

In a GSM only base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable canbe used for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 CableFigure 8-11 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmissionboard in the BBU3900.

Figure 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-11 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-11 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-12 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured astransmission boards in the BBU3900.

Figure 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-12 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 143: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-12 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE CableFigure 8-13 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE Ethernet cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 8-13 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-13 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-14 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM only base station when theFE/GE optical cable is used for data transmission.

Figure 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-14 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-15

Page 144: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-14 FE/GE optical cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM OnlyBase Station

In a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable

Figure 8-15 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission.

Figure 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-15 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-15 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable

Figure 8-16 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is usedfor data transmission.

Figure 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Table 8-16 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 145: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-17 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used fordata transmission.

Figure 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-17 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-17 FE/GE optical cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.3 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor UMTS OnlyBase Station

In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable

Figure 8-18 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 8-18 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-17

Page 146: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-18 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-19 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where the WMPT and UTRP3 (or UTRP4) are configured asthe main control board in the BBU.

Figure 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Table 8-19 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-19 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable

Figure 8-20 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 8-20 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 147: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-20 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-21 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP9 are configured inthe BBU.

Figure 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Table 8-21 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-21 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-22 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Table 8-22 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-19

Page 148: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-22 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-23 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where the WMPT and the UTRP2 are configured inthe BBU.

Figure 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Table 8-23 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-23 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.4 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor UMTS OnlyBase Station

In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.

Transmission over the E1 Cable

Figure 8-24 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Table 8-24 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 149: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-24 E1/T1 cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-25 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used fordata transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured inthe BBU.

Figure 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Table 8-25 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-25 E1/T1 cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE Cable

Figure 8-26 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Table 8-26 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-26 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-21

Page 150: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-27 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured inthe BBU.

Figure 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Table 8-27 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-27 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-28 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.

Figure 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Table 8-28 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-28 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-29 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured inthe BBU.

Figure 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 151: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-29 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-29 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.5 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor LTE OnlyBase Station

In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 CableWhen the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 8-30 showsthe transmission cable connections.

Figure 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-30 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-30 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE CableWhen an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usuallyused for data transmission. Figure 8-31 shows the transmission cable connections.

Figure 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-23

Page 152: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-31 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-31 FE/GE optical cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.6 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor LTE Only BaseStation

In an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.

Transmission over the E1/T1 CableWhen the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 8-32 showsthe transmission cable connections.

Figure 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections

Table 8-32 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-32 E1/T1 cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Transmission over the FE CableWhen an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usuallyused for data transmission. Figure 8-33 shows the transmission cable connections.

Figure 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections

Table 8-33 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 153: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-33 FE/GE optical cable connections

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.7 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used.

TDM Co-Transmission

Figure 8-34 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMco-transmission mode when the GTMU E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GTMU and the WMPTto implement TDM co-transmission.

Figure 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (1)

Table 8-34 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-34 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-35 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMco-transmission mode when the E1/T1 port of the GSM UTRP is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GSM UTRP and theWMPT to implement TDM co-transmission.

NOTE

Note that in this scenario, the E1/T1 ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are also used for data transmission, butthe corresponding cable connection is not shown here.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-25

Page 154: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (2)

Table 8-35 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-35 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Co-TransmissionFigure 8-36 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission,and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implementIP co-transmission.

NOTE

IP co-transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and theWMPT, whose transmission cable connection is similar to Figure 8-36. Therefore, the transmission cableconnection that interconnects the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP co-transmission is not shown here.

Figure 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-36 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-36 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 155: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T2 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T3 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-37 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE electrical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected toimplement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-37 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-37 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

T2 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T3 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-38 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnectedto implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

Table 8-38 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-27

Page 156: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-38 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-39 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared portsfor data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 areinterconnected to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Table 8-39 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-39 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.8 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used.

TDM Co-TransmissionFigure 8-40 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMco-transmission mode when the GTMU E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GTMU and the WMPTto implement TDM co-transmission.

Figure 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (1)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 157: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-40 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-40 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMco-transmission mode when the E1/T1 port of the GSM UTRP is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the backplane-based communication is adopted by the GSM UTRP and theWMPT to implement TDM co-transmission.

NOTE

Note that in this scenario, the E1/T1 ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are also used for data transmission, butthe corresponding cable connection is not shown here.

Figure 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (2)

Table 8-41 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-41 Transmission cable connections in TDM co-transmission mode for a GSM+UMTSbase station (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

IP Co-Transmission

Figure 8-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT E1/T1 port is used as the shared port for data transmission,and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected to implementIP co-transmission.

NOTE

IP co-transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and theWMPT, whose transmission cable connection is similar to Figure 8-42. Therefore, the transmission cableconnection that interconnects the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IP co-transmission is not shown here.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-29

Page 158: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-42 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-42 E1/T1 cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

Figure 8-43 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE electrical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected toimplement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Table 8-43 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-43 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections in IP co-transmission mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

Figure 8-44 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnectedto implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 159: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-44 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-44 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-45 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared portsfor data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 areinterconnected to implement IP co-transmission.

Figure 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Table 8-45 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-45 FE/GE optical cable connections in IP co-transmission mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.9 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1

Figure 8-46 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for datatransmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works inseparate transmission mode.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-31

Page 160: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1mode

Table 8-46 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-46 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1 mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GE

Figure 8-47 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.

Figure 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-47 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 161: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-48 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.

Figure 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-48 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.10 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1Figure 8-49 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for datatransmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works inseparate transmission mode.

Figure 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode

Table 8-49 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-49 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-33

Page 162: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEFigure 8-50 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.

Figure 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)

Table 8-50 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-50 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-51 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.

Figure 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)

Table 8-51 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-51 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.11 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+UMTS Base Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU andWMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 163: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:

l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC or RNCthrough the primary channel respectively.

l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.

l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.

l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:

l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1transmission.

l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSMand UMTS transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.

l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPTpanels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the BSC and the RNC.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC.

Figure 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-52 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-52 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-35

Page 164: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-53 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC.

Figure 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-53 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-53 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FEoptical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.12 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+UMTSBase Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A GSM+UMTS base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and WMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU andWMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the BSC and RNC.

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:

l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC or RNCthrough the primary channel respectively.

l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 165: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.

l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+UMTS base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1

transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM

and UMTS transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT

panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the BSC and the RNC.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-54 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC.

Figure 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-54 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-54 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-37

Page 166: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-55 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and WMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC and RNC.

Figure 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-55 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-55 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FEoptical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.13 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FEports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data TransmissionFigure 8-56 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 167: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-56 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-56 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

T2 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T3 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-57 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-57 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-57 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data TransmissionFigure 8-58 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-39

Page 168: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-58 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-58 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

Figure 8-59 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Table 8-59 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-59 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 169: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.2.14 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In a GSM+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting the FEports on the GTMU panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT or theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission

Figure 8-60 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-60 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-60 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

Figure 8-61 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-61 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-41

Page 170: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-61 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data Transmission

Figure 8-62 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Table 8-62 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-62 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

Figure 8-63 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.

Figure 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 171: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-63 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-63 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.15 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 8-64 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-64 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-64 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-43

Page 172: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-65 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-65 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-65 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-66 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port isused for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-66 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 173: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-66 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T6 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-67 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is usedfor data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-67 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-67 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 8-68 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both theGSM and LTE sides.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-45

Page 174: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Table 8-68 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-68 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-69 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical portis used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Table 8-69 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-69 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 175: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.2.16 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GEFigure 8-70 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-70 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-70 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-71 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-71 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-47

Page 176: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-71 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-72 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port isused for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-72 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-72 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-73 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is usedfor data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 177: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-73 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-73 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 8-74 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both theGSM and LTE sides.

Figure 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Table 8-74 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-74 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-75 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical portis used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Table 8-75 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-49

Page 178: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-75 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.17 Transmission Cable Connections in the Outdoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection betweenthe FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPTpanels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, andthe FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network

through the primary channel.l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel

is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the

GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1

transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM

and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT

panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-76 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transportnetwork.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 179: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-76 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-76 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-77 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

Figure 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-77 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-77 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FEoptical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-51

Page 180: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.18 Transmission Cable Connections in the Indoor GSM+LTEBase Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A GSM+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnection betweenthe FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPTpanels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, andthe FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport network

through the primary channel.l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channel

is restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of the

GSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1

transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM

and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT

panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-78 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transportnetwork.

Figure 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 181: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-78 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-78 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-79 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

Figure 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-79 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-79 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FEoptical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.19 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting theFE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT orthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-53

Page 182: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data TransmissionFigure 8-80 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-80 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-80 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

T2 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T3 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-81 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-81 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-81 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 183: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data TransmissionFigure 8-82 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Table 8-82 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-82 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

Figure 8-83 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-55

Page 184: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-83 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-83 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.20 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Co-Transmission Mode

In a UMTS+LTE base station, IP co-transmission can be implemented by interconnecting theFE ports on the WMPT panel and the LMPT panel and using the FE/GE port on the LMPT orthe E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP as the shared port for data transmission.

Shared FE/GE Port on the LMPT for Data Transmission

Figure 8-84 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-84 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-84 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE electrical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 185: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-85 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Table 8-85 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-85 Transmission cable connections with the shared FE/GE optical port on the LMPTfor data transmission

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Shared E1/T1 Port on the LTE UTRP for Data TransmissionFigure 8-86 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Table 8-86 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-86 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-57

Page 186: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-87 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.

Figure 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Table 8-87 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-87 Transmission cable connections with the shared E1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP fordata transmission (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.21 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GEFigure 8-88 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 187: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-88 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-88 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-89 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-89 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-89 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

Figure 8-90 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-59

Page 188: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-90 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-90 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T6 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-91 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-91 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-91 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 189: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable Number Cable Description

T2 and T4 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T5 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEFigure 8-92 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS andLTE sides.

Figure 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-92 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-92 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-93 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE opticalport is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-93 describes the cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-61

Page 190: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-93 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.22 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Separate Transmission Mode

When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.

UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE

Figure 8-94 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-94 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-94 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-95 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 191: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-95 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-95 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

Figure 8-96 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

Figure 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-96 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-96 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-97 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-63

Page 192: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-97 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-97 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE

Figure 8-98 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS andLTE sides.

Figure 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Table 8-98 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-98 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

Figure 8-99 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE opticalport is used for data transmission on the LTE side.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 193: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Table 8-99 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-99 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

8.2.23 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:

l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport networkthrough the primary channel.

l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.

l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.

l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theUMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:

l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1transmission.

l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTSand LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.

l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPTpanels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-65

Page 194: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-100 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transportnetwork.

Figure 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-100 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-100 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 and T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-101 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

Figure 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-101 describes the cable connections.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 195: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-101 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8.2.24 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Route Backup Transmission Mode

A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:

l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport networkthrough the primary channel.

l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.

l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.

l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theUMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.

In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:

l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1transmission.

l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTSand LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.

l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPTpanels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.

FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-102 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transportnetwork.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-67

Page 196: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-102 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-102 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

FE Electrical Ports for Interconnection and FE Optical Ports Connected to theTransport Network

Figure 8-103 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup transmission mode when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT and LMPT areinterconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the transport network.

Figure 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Table 8-103 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-103 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the transport network

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 and T2 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 197: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.2.25 Transmission Cable Connection in the Outdoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode

A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, hybridtransmission can be implemented. That is, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port are usedas shared ports for data transmission. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services with highQoS requirements, such as CS services. The FE/GE port is used to transmit the services withlow QoS requirements, such as PS services.

The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTEbase station in hybrid transmission. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port areused for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Electrical Port for Data Transmission

Figure 8-104 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybridtransmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE electrical port are used fordata transmission.

Figure 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port +LTE FE/GE electrical port)

Table 8-104 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-104 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTEFE/GE electrical port)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection TransferCable.

T4 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T5 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-69

Page 198: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Optical Port for Data TransmissionFigure 8-105 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybridtransmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE optical port are used fordata transmission.

Figure 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port +LTE FE/GE optical port)

Table 8-105 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-105 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTEFE/GE optical port)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection TransferCable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

T4 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

8.2.26 Transmission Cable Connection in the Indoor UMTS+LTEBase Station in Hybrid Transmission Mode

A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on theco-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE ports on the WMPT andLMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used forinterconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transport network.

The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTEbase station in hybrid transmission. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GE port areused for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Electrical Port for Data TransmissionFigure 8-106 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybridtransmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE electrical port are used fordata transmission.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 199: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port +LTE FE/GE electrical port)

Table 8-106 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-106 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTEFE/GE electrical port)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.7 FE/GE Cable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.10 Cable Between Two FE OpticalPorts.

UMTS E1/T1 Port and LTE FE/GE Optical Port for Data Transmission

Figure 8-107 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in hybridtransmission mode when the UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE optical port are used fordata transmission.

Figure 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port +LTE FE/GE optical port)

Table 8-107 describes the cable connections.

Table 8-107 Transmission cable connections for hybrid transmission (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTEFE/GE optical port)

Cable Number Cable Description

T1 See 9.11 FE/GE Optical Cable.

T2 See 9.5 E1/T1 Cable.

T3 See 9.9 Cable Between Two FE ElectricalPorts.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-71

Page 200: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cable connections in the DBS3900 vary according to the working modes of theDBS3900.

8.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connectionscan be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

8.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections canbe used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

8.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cableconnections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

8.3.1 CPRI Cable Connection in the UMTS Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connectionscan be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

Figure 8-108 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, and theMIMO is supported.

Figure 8-108 CPRI cable connections (1)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 201: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-109 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPb,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMOis supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sectorare cascaded.

Figure 8-109 CPRI cable connections (2)

Figure 8-110 shows the CPRI cable connections when the BBU is configured with the WBBPd,the RRU3804 works in single-band mode and supports not more than three sectors, the MIMOis supported or bandwidth and carriers are expanded, and two RRU3804s work in the same sectorare cascaded.

Figure 8-110 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.3.2 CPRI Cable Connection in the GSM Only Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cable connections canbe used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-73

Page 202: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, six RRUs correspond to three sectors.In this case, a pair of two RRUs working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded.Figure 8-111 shows the CPRI cable connections.

Figure 8-111 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, nine RRUs correspond to threesectors. In this case, a group of three RRUs working in the same sector with different bands iscascaded. Figure 8-112 shows the CPRI cable connections.

Figure 8-112 CPRI cable connections (2)

8.3.3 CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GSM+UMTS mode, multiple methods of the CPRI cableconnections can be used due to varied number of sectors and frequency bands.

Figure 8-113 shows the CPRI cable connections when the RRU3908 works in single-band modeand three RRU3908s working in dual-star topology correspond to three sectors.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 203: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-113 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, an RRU3804 working in star topologycorresponds to a sector, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, twoRRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star and chain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair oftwo RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, theCPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-114.

Figure 8-114 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3804 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3804s correspond to a sector, and apair of two RRU3804s working in the same sector with different bands is cascaded, or when theRRU3008/RRU3004 works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star andchain topology correspond to a sector, and a pair of two RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in thesame sector with different bands is cascaded, the CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure8-115.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-75

Page 204: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-115 CPRI cable connections (3)

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s working in dual-star topologycorrespond to three sectors, or when the RRU3008/RRU3004 works in single-band mode, andthree RRU3008s/RRU3004s working in star topology correspond to three sectors, the CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 8-116.

Figure 8-116 CPRI cable connections (4)

8.3.4 CPRI Cable Connection in the LO Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in LTE mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 205: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHzor 20 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown inFigure 8-117.

Figure 8-117 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 10 MHzbandwidth, and supports 4T4R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure8-118.

Figure 8-118 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU works in single-band mode, it serves not more than three sectors, uses 20 MHzbandwidth, and supports 4T4R MIMO. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure8-119.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-77

Page 206: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-119 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.3.5 CPRI Cable Connections in the GL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in GL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008 works in dual-band mode, twoRRU3008s working in CPRI star topology correspond to one sector, and a pair of two RRU3008sworking in the same sector with different bands are connected in cascading mode. The CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 8-120.

Figure 8-120 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3008works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, anda pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected incascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-121.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 207: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-121 CPRI cable connections (2)

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs in a sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008works in dual-band mode, two RRU3008s working in CPRI star topology serve one sector, anda pair of two RRU3008s working in the same sector with different bands are connected incascading mode. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure 8-122.

Figure 8-122 CPRI cable connections (3)

When the RRU3908 works in single-band mode, three RRU3908s serve three sectors, and theRRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology. When the RRU3008 works insingle-band mode, three RRU3008s working in star topology serve three sectors. The CPRI cableconnections are shown in Figure 8-123.

Figure 8-123 CPRI cable connections (4)

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-79

Page 208: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

8.3.6 CPRI Cable Connections in the a UL Base StationWhen the DBS3900 works in UL mode, CPRI cable connections vary depending on the sectorand frequency band.

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it workingin CPRI star topology serves three sectors and does not support MIMO. The CPRI cableconnections are shown in Figure 8-124.

Figure 8-124 CPRI cable connections (1)

When the RRU3201 works in dual-band mode, it working in CPRI star topology serves threesectors, uses 20 MHz or 15 MHz bandwidth, and supports 2T2R MIMO. When the RRU3804works in single-band mode, a pair of RRUs working in the same sector are connected incascading mode, and the star topology is used. The CPRI cable connections are shown in Figure8-125.

Figure 8-125 CPRI cable connections (2)

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 209: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

When the RRU3201 works in single-band mode, it serves three sectors, uses 10 MHz bandwidth,supports 4T4R MIMO, and the RRUs working in the same sector use the dual-star topology.When the RRU3804 works in single-band mode, it working in star topology corresponds to threesectors, and the RRUs working in the same sector are connected in cascading mode. The CPRIcable connections are shown in Figure 8-126.

Figure 8-126 CPRI cable connections (3)

8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThe monitoring signal cable connections are different for the distributed base station in 110 VAC/220 V AC and -48 V DC power supply scenarios.

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the 110 V AC/220 V AC Power SupplyScenario

Figure 8-127 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 with theconfiguration of 1 APM30H+1 TMC+1 BBC in the 110 V/220 V AC power supply scenario.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-81

Page 210: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-127 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Table 8-108 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-108 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30+1 TMC+1 BBC

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theAPMI and the BBU

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

S5 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the APM30Transmission Cabinet

Figure 8-128 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 211: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-128 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Table 8-109 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-109 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 BBC

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU

S4 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

Figure 8-129 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-83

Page 212: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-129 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Table 8-110 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-110 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+1 IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU

S4 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

S5 and S6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

Figure 8-130 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 213: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-130 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Table 8-111 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-111 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU

Figure 8-131 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-85

Page 214: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-131 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC

Table 8-112 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-112 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 BBC

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

S5 and S6 Temperature Monitoring Signal Cable for theBatteries

Figure 8-132 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 2 APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 215: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-132 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T

Table 8-113 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-113 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. A)+1 TMC11H (Ver. A)+2 IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU

S3 and S7 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU

S5 and S6 IBBS200T Monitoring Signal Cable

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

Figure 8-133 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 1 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-87

Page 216: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-133 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Table 8-114 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-114 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 1APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+2 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs

Figure 8-134 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is in theconfiguration of 2 APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 217: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-134 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

S2S2 S3S3S1S1

S1S1

S5S5

S4S4S6S6

S2S2 S6S6S1S1

S1S1

S4S4S6S6

Table 8-115 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-115 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station in the configuration of 2APM30H (Ver. B)+1 TMC11H (Ver. B)+4 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Environment Monitoring Signal Cable

S2 and S4 Monitoring Signal Transfer Cable

S3 and S5 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU

S6 Monitoring Signal Cable Between CascadedCMUAs

Figure 8-135 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured withone OMB in the AC power supply scenario.

Figure 8-135 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in theAC power supply scenario

S1S1

S1

S2S2

S2S2

S2S2

S2S2

S3S3

S3S3

S5S5S5

S4S4

S4S4

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-89

Page 218: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-116 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-116 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in theAC power supply scenario

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC SurgeProtection Box

S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DCPower Equipment

Monitoring Signal Cable Connections in the -48 V DC Power Supply ScenarioFigure 8-136 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured withtwo TMCs in the -48 V DC power supply scenario.

Figure 8-136 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Table 8-117 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-117 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with two TMCs

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 and S2 9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theAPMI and the BBU

Figure 8-137 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith 2 TMC11Hs (Ver. A).

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 219: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 8-137 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Table 8-118 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-118 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver. A)

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 and S2 9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theHEUA and the BBU

Figure 8-138 shows the monitoring signal cable connections when the DBS3900 is configuredwith 2 TMC11Hs (Ver. B).

Figure 8-138 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Table 8-119 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

BBU3900Hardware Description 8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-91

Page 220: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 8-119 Monitoring signal cable connections of a base station configured with twoTMC11Hs (Ver. B)

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 and S2 9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between theCMUA and the BBU

Figure 8-139 shows the monitoring signal cable connections of the DBS3900 configured withone OMB in the DC power supply scenario.

Figure 8-139 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in theDC power supply scenario

Table 8-120 describes the monitoring signal cable connections.

Table 8-120 Monitoring cable connections of a base station configured with one OMB in theDC power supply scenario

Cable Number Cable Description

S1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Door StatusSensor

S2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan

S3 Monitoring Signal Cable for the HEUA

S4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC SurgeProtection Box

S5 Monitoring Signal Cable for the AC/DCPower Equipment

8 Cable Connections of the DBS3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

8-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 221: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

9 BBU3900 Cables

About This Chapter

This describes the cables of the BBU3900 in terms of their appearance, pin assignment, andinstallation positions.

9.1 List of BBU3900 CablesThis describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU powercable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protectiontransfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable betweenFE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU,monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA,monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC),BBU alarm cable and GPS clock signal cable.

9.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.

9.3 BBU Power CableThis section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cablecan be used, depending on the power supply scenario.

9.4 BBU Power cable(OMB)The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.

9.5 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.

9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer CableThis section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to thetransmission board. This cable is optional.

9.7 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.

9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer Cable

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

Page 222: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main controlboard to the UFLP.

9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.

9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.

9.11 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.

9.12 CPRI Optical CableThe CPRI optical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and the RRU or between RRUs.

9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and the BBUThis describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits theenvironment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.

9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and the BBUThe monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoringinformation collected by the HEUA to the BBU.

9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and the BBUThe monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBUand transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.

9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal CableThis section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals fromthe EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.

9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerfault alarms on the PSU.

9.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.

9.19 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.

9.20 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 223: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

9.1 List of BBU3900 CablesThis describes the BBU3900 cables. The BBU3900 cables are the PGND cable, BBU powercable, E1/T1 cable, E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable, FE/GE cable, FE/GE surge protectiontransfer cable, interconnection cable between FE electrical ports, interconnection cable betweenFE optical ports, CPRI optical cable, monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU,monitoring signal cable between HEUA and BBU, monitoring signal cable for the EMUA,monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC), in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC),BBU alarm cable and GPS clock signal cable.

Table 9-1 describes the List of BBU3900 Cables.

Table 9-1 List of BBU3900 Cables

Cable One End The Other End

Connector InstallationPosition

Connector InstallationPosition

9.2 PGNDCable

OT terminal(6mm2, M4)

BBU/Grounding bolt

OT terminal(6mm2, M8)

Nearestgrounding bar

9.3 BBUPowerCable

3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/PWR

OT terminal(6mm2, M4)

DCDU/LOAD6

3V3 connector BBU/UPEU/PWR

Easy PowerReceptacle(Pressfit Type)Connector

EPS/LOAD1

9.5 E1/T1Cable

DB26 connector E1/T1 port onthe GTMU orUELP or WMPTor UTRP in theBBU

The connectorneeds to be madeon site accordingto the fieldrequirements.

Port on thetransmissiondevice

9.6 E1/T1SurgeProtectionTransferCable

DB26 connector E1/T1 port onthe GTMU orWMPT orUTRP in theBBU

DB25 connector BBU/UELP/INSIDE

9.7 FE/GECable

RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/FE0 port at theOUTSIDE sideBBU/GTMU orWMPT/FE0FE/GE port onthe UTRP in theBBU

RJ-45 connector Port on thetransmissiondevice

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

Page 224: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable One End The Other End

Connector InstallationPosition

Connector InstallationPosition

9.8 FE/GESurgeProtectionTransferCable

RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU orWMPT/FE0FE/GE port onthe UTRP in theBBUFE/GE port onthe LMPT in theBBU

RJ-45 connector BBU/UFLP/FE0port at theINSIDE side

9.9 CableBetweenTwo FEElectricalPorts

RJ-45 connector BBU/WMPT/FE0

RJ-45 connector BBU/GTMU/FE0

9.10 CableBetweenTwo FEOpticalPorts

LC connector BBU/WMPT/FE1

LC connector BBU/GTMU/FE1

9.11 FE/GEOpticalCable

LC connector BBU/WMPT orGTMU/FE1

FC/SC/LCconnector

Port on thetransmissiondevice

9.12 CPRIOpticalCable

DLC connector BBU/GTMU orWBBP/CPRI

DLC connector RRU/CPRI_W

9.13MonitoringSignalCableBetween theAPMI andthe BBU

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON1

Twisted pair APMI/TX+, TX-,RX+, RX-

9.14MonitoringSignalCableBetween theHEUA andthe BBU

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON

RJ-45 connector HEUA/COM_IN

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 225: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Cable One End The Other End

Connector InstallationPosition

Connector InstallationPosition

9.15MonitoringSignalCableBetween theCMUA andthe BBU

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/MON1

RJ-45 connector CMUA/COM_IN

9.16 EMUAMonitoringSignalCable

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU/MON1

DB9 maleconnector

EMUA/RS-485port

9.17MonitoringSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM0

Cord endterminal

PSU(DC/DC)/ALM

9.18 In-PositionSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM1

RJ-45 connector PSU(DC/DC)/PRESENT

9.19 BBUAlarmCable

RJ-45 connector BBU/UPEU orUEIU/EXT_ALM

RJ-45 connector Port on theexternalmonitoringdevice

9.20 GPSClockSignalCable

SMA maleconnector

BBU/WMPT orUSCU/GPS

N-type femaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

9.2 PGND CableThe PGND cable ensures the grounding of the BBU.

StructureThe green and yellow PGND cable is a single cable with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2. Bothends of the cable are OT terminals. If you prepare the cable by yourself, it is recommended thatyou use a copper-based cable with a minimum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.

Figure 9-1 shows the PGND cable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

Page 226: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-1 PGND cable

(1) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

9.3 BBU Power CableThis section describes the BBU power cable. Either -48 V power cable or +24 V power cablecan be used, depending on the power supply scenario.

Exterior

The BBU power cable depends on the type of the cabinet containing the BBU, because differenttypes of cabinet use different power supplies.

When the power supply device is the DCDU or PDU, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connectorat one end and bare wires at the other end. Based on the connector of the power distributiondevice, appropriate terminals are added to the bare wire end on site. Figure 9-2 shows the BBUpower cable with OT terminals at the bare wire end as an example.

Figure 9-2 BBU power cable (1)

(1) 3V3 connector (2) OT terminal (6 mm2, M4)

NOTE

There are two wires in the -48 V power cable with a blue wire and a black wire. The +24 V power cableand the -48 V power cable have the same exterior, but they differ in color. The +24 V power cable has ared wire and a black wire.

When the power supply device is the EPS, the BBU power cable has a 3V3 connector at oneend and an easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector at the other end. Figure 9-3 showsthe BBU power cable.

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 227: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-3 BBU power cable (2)

(1) Easy power receptacle (pressfit type) connector (2) 3V3 power connector

Pin AssignmentThe power cable is a 2-wire cable. Table 9-2 and Table 9-3 describe the pin assignment for thewires of the power cable.

Table 9-2 Pin assignment for the wires of the -48 V power cable

Pin on the 3V3Connector

Color Description

A1 Blue -48 V

A2 - -

A3 Black GND

Table 9-3 Pin assignment for the wires of the +24 V power cable

Pin on the 3V3 Connector Color Description

A1 Red +24 V

A2 - -

A3 Black GND

9.4 BBU Power cable(OMB)The BBU power cable in the OMB is used to supply -48 V DC power to the BBU and HEUA.The DC OMB and AC OMB require different power cables between the BBU and the HEUA.

AppearanceFigure 9-4 shows the appearance of power cable(AC OMB).

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

Page 228: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-4 Appearance of power cable(AC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector for the BBU (2) H4 connector (3) 3V3 power connector for the HEUA

Figure 9-5 shows the appearance of power cable(DC OMB).

Figure 9-5 Appearance of power cable(DC OMB)

(1) 3V3 power connector (2) OT terminal

9.5 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.

Exterior

The E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twistedpair cable.

One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of thecable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 9-6 shows an E1/T1 cable.

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 229: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-6 E1/T1 cable

(1) DB26 male connector

Table 9-4 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.

Table 9-4 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Cable One End The other End

75-ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector

L9 female connector

SMB female connector

BNC male connector

SMZ male connector

SMZ female connector

Pin AssignmentTable 9-5 and Table 9-6 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.

NOTE

In Table 9-5, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor ofthe cable.

Table 9-5 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable

Pins of the DB26Male Connector

Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label

X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+

X1.2 Ring RX1-

X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+

X1.4 Ring RX2-

X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

Page 230: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Pins of the DB26Male Connector

Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label

X1.6 Ring RX3-

X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+

X1.8 Ring RX4-

X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+

X1.20 Ring TX1-

X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+

X1.22 Ring TX2-

X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+

X1.24 Ring TX3-

X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+

X1.26 Ring TX4-

Table 9-6 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable

Pins of the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels

X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+

X.2 White RX1-

X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+

X.4 White RX2-

X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+

X.6 White RX3-

X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+

X.8 White RX4-

X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+

X.20 White TX1-

X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+

X.22 Red TX2-

X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+

X.24 Red TX3-

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 231: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Pins of the DB26Male Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels

X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+

X.26 Red TX4-

9.6 E1/T1 Surge Protection Transfer CableThis section describes the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable connecting the UELP to thetransmission board. This cable is optional.

ExteriorThe E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable has a DB26 male connector at one end and a DB25male connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-7.

Figure 9-7 E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

(1) DB25 male connector (2) DB26 male connector

Pin AssignmentTable 9-7 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable.

Table 9-7 Pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector

Type Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector

X1.20 Twisted pair cable X2.2

X1.19 X2.3

X1.4 Twisted pair cable X2.4

X1.3 X2.5

X1.22 Twisted pair cable X2.6

X1.21 X2.7

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

Page 232: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Pin on the DB26 MaleConnector

Type Pin on the DB25 MaleConnector

X1.6 Twisted pair cable X2.8

X1.5 X2.9

X1.24 Twisted pair cable X2.10

X1.23 X2.11

X1.8 Twisted pair cable X2.12

X1.7 X2.13

X1.1 Twisted pair cable X2.14

X1.2 X2.15

X1.25 Twisted pair cable X2.24

X1.26 X2.25

9.7 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.

NOTEThe maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.

Exterior

The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ-45 connector at each end, asshown in Figure 9-8.

Figure 9-8 FE/GE cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 9-8 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 233: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 9-8 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable

Pin on the RJ-45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ-45 Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White andorange

X2.1

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White andgreen

X2.3

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White and blue X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White andbrown

X2.7

9.8 FE/GE Surge Protection Transfer CableThe FE/GE surge protection transfer cable is an optional cable that connects the main controlboard to the UFLP.

Exterior

The FE/GE surge protection transfer cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown inFigure 9-9.

Figure 9-9 FE/GE surge protection transfer cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 9-9 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfercable.

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

Page 234: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 9-9 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE surge protection transfer cable

Pin on the RJ-45Connector

Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ-45 Connector

X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2

X1.1 White X2.1

X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6

X1.3 White X2.3

X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4

X1.5 White X2.5

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8

X1.7 White X2.7

9.9 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.

StructureThe cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown inFigure 9-10.

Figure 9-10 Cable between two FE electrical ports

(1) RJ-45 connector

9.10 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.

StructureThe cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure9-11.

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 235: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-11 Cable between two FE optical ports

(1) LC connector

9.11 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.

Exterior

The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-12, Figure 9-13, and Figure 9-14respectively.

Figure 9-12 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)

Figure 9-13 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)

Figure 9-14 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

Page 236: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

CAUTIONWhen connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable,adhere to the following rules:l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device.l The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.

9.12 CPRI Optical CableThe CPRI optical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and the RRU or between RRUs.

ExteriorThe CPRI optical cable is categorized into the multi-mode optical cable and single-mode opticalcable. When the distance between the BBU and the RRU is shorter than 100 m, a multi-modeoptical cable is required. When the distance between the BBU and the RRU is longer than 100m, a single-mode optical cable is required. A single-mode optical cable connects the BBU to theODF and the ODF to the RRU to transmit CPRI signals.

A multi-mode optical cable is a multi-mode cable with a DLC connector at each end. Figure9-15 shows the multi-mode optical cable.

Figure 9-15 Multi-mode optical cable

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch cable (3) Label on the branch cable

When a multi-mode optical cable is used for connection between the BBU and RRU, the branchcables on the BBU side and RRU side are 0.34 m and 0.03 m long respectively. When a multi-mode optical cable is used for connection between RRUs, the branch cables on both RRU sidesare 0.03 m long.

A single-mode optical cable has a DLC connector at one end and two FC connectors at the otherend, as shown in Figure 9-16.

Figure 9-16 Single-mode optical cable

(1) DLC connector (2) Branch cable

(3) Label on the branch cable (4) FC connector

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 237: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

When a single-mode optical cable is used for connection between the BBU and the ODF, thebranch cables on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.34 m and 0.8 m long respectively.

When a single-mode optical cable is used for connection between the ODF and RRU, the branchcables on the BBU side and ODF side are 0.03 m and 0.8 m long respectively.

NOTEThe CPRI optical cable must be connected to the optical module in the CPRI port on the BBU or RRU. Themulti-mode optical cable and single-mode optical cable are used for the multi-mode optical module and single-mode optical module respectively.

Pin Assignment

Table 9-10, Table 9-11, and Table 9-12 describe the labels and recommended connections forthe branch cables of the CRPI optical cable.

Table 9-10 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-modeoptical cable between the BBU and RRU

Label Color Installation Position

1A Orange CPRI RX port on the RRU

1B Gray CPRI TX port on the RRU

2A Orange TX port on the BBU

2B Gray RX port on the BBU

Table 9-11 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the multi-modeoptical cable between RRUs

Label Color Installation Position

1A Orange CPRI RX port on the RRU 1

1B Gray CPRI TX port on the RRU 1

2A Orange CPRI TX port on the RRU 0

2B Gray CPRI RX port on the RRU 0

Table 9-12 Labels and recommended connections for the branch cables of the single-modeoptical cable and recommended connections

Label Color Installation Position

1A Yellow RX port on the BBU or CPRI RX porton the RRU

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

Page 238: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Color Installation Position

1B Blue TX port on the BBU or CPRI TX port onthe RRU

2A Yellow ODF

2B Blue ODF

9.13 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the APMI and theBBU

This describes the monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU. It transmits theenvironment monitoring signals of the power cabinet to the BBU.

Structure

The monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU has an RJ-45 connector at one endand four bare wires at the other end. Figure 9-17 shows the monitoring signal cable betweenthe APMI and the BBU.

Figure 9-17 Monitoring signal cable between the APMI and the BBU

Pin Assignment

Table 9-13 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe APMI and the BBU.

Table 9-13 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the APMI andthe BBU

Pin on theRJ-45Connector

Color X2 to X5 Ends Description Terminal on theAPMI

X1.1 White X2 Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 Orange X3 TX-

X1.4 Blue X4 Twisted pair RX+

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 239: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Pin on theRJ-45Connector

Color X2 to X5 Ends Description Terminal on theAPMI

X1.5 White X5 RX-

9.14 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the HEUA and theBBU

The monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU transmits the monitoringinformation collected by the HEUA to the BBU.

AppearanceFigure 9-18 shows the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU.

Figure 9-18 Monitoring signal cable between the HEUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 9-14 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe HEUA and the BBU.

Table 9-14 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the HEUA andthe BBU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

Page 240: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

9.15 Monitoring Signal Cable Between the CMUA and theBBU

The monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU connects the CMUA to the BBUand transmits the monitoring signals collected by the CMUA to the BBU.

Exterior

Figure 9-19 shows the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU.

Figure 9-19 Monitoring signal cable between the CMUA and the BBU

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 9-15 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable betweenthe CMUA and the BBU.

Table 9-15 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable between the CMUA andthe BBU

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 241: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

9.16 EMUA Monitoring Signal CableThis section describes the EMUA monitoring signal cable. It transmits monitoring signals fromthe EMUA to the BBU. This cable is delivered with the EMUA.

Exterior

Figure 9-20 shows the EMUA monitoring signal cable.

Figure 9-20 EMUA monitoring signal cable

(1) RJ-45 connector (2) DB9 male connector

Pin Assignment

Table 9-16 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable.

Table 9-16 Pin assignment for the wires of the EMUA monitoring signal cable

Pin on theRJ-45Connector

Pin on the DB9Male Connector

Color Description Terminal onthe APMI

X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+

X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-

X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-

X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

Page 242: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

9.17 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerfault alarms on the PSU.

Structure

Figure 9-21 shows the Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

Figure 9-21 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

Pin Assignment

Table 9-17 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).

Table 9-17 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

X1 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.2 Blue Twisted pair

X1.1 White

X1.6 Orange Twisted pair

X1.3 White

X1.4 Green Twisted pair

X1.5 White

X1.8 Brown Twisted pair

X1.7 White

9.18 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.

Exterior

Figure 9-22 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 243: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-22 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin AssignmentTable 9-18 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).

Table 9-18 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)

X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type

X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

9.19 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.

ExteriorThe BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 9-23. However,an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be addedaccording to the field requirements.

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-23

Page 244: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 9-23 BBU alarm cable

(1) RJ-45 connector

Pin Assignment

Table 9-19 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.

Table 9-19 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable

BBUAlarmPort

Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd

WireColor

WireType

Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd

Description

EXT-ALM1

X1.1 White andorange

Twistedpair

X2.1 Boolean value input 4+

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 4-(GND)

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair

X2.3 Boolean value input 5+

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 5-(GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair

X2.5 Boolean value input 6+

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 6-(GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair

X2.7 Boolean value input 7+

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 7-(GND)

EXT-ALM0

X1.1 White andorange

Twistedpair

X2.1 Boolean value input 0+

X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 0-(GND)

9 BBU3900 CablesBBU3900

Hardware Description

9-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 245: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

BBUAlarmPort

Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd

WireColor

WireType

Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd

Description

X1.3 White andgreen

Twistedpair

X2.3 Boolean value input 1+

X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 1-(GND)

X1.5 White andblue

Twistedpair

X2.5 Boolean value input 2+

X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 2-(GND)

X1.7 White andbrown

Twistedpair

X2.7 Boolean value input 3+

X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 3-(GND)

9.20 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.

ExteriorThe GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type femaleconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 9-24.

Figure 9-24 GPS clock signal cable

(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector

BBU3900Hardware Description 9 BBU3900 Cables

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

Page 246: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)
Page 247: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

About This Chapter

This describes the auxiliary devices of the BBU3900. The devices consist of the EMUA andSLPU.

10.1 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.

10.2 OMBThe Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMBcabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmissionequipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internalmodules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, andthe grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,mould, and salt fog damage.

10.3 IMB03The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-inBBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.

10.4 DCDU-03The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B andDCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models havethe same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports.

10.5 AC/DC Power EquipmentThe AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input powerdistribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convertthe 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DCpower to the components in the cabinet.

10.6 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

Page 248: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

10.1 EMUAThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMUA) monitors the internal environment of the cabinetand reports related alarms.

The EMUA is connected to the main equipment through alarm cables, monitoring theenvironment information of the equipment room and cabinet. The EMUA monitors the followingitems:

l Environment such as the temperature and humidity, water damage, and smoke

l Intrusion status through the infrared equipment and door status sensor

l Power distribution

For details about the structure and functions of the EMUA, see the EMUA User Guide.

10.2 OMBThe Outdoor Mini Box (OMB) is an outdoor BBU subrack, which is used outdoors. The OMBcabinet is equipped with the BBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU and transmissionequipment. The OMB cabinet is easy to install and maintain. The cable distribution for internalmodules is convenient. The OMB cabinet has good waterproof and dustproof performance, andthe grounding function. In addition, the OMB cabinet provides the protection against moisture,mould, and salt fog damage.

Appearance

Figure 10-1 shows the OMB cabinet.

Figure 10-1 Appearance of the OMB(Unit: mm)

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 249: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

FunctionsThe functions of the OMB cabinet are as follows:l Providing 3 U installation space for the distributed BTS.l Supporting the AC input modes of 220 V single-phase, 110 V dual-live two-phase.l Supporting -48 V DC power input.l Providing secure and reliable surge protection and inductive lightning protection through

the AC surge protection box (optional).l Connecting the grounding bus of the cabinet, PGND cable of the surge protector, and PGND

cables of other devices to the grounding busbar of the cabinet.l Dissipating heat by using the core of the heat exchanger and outer and inner air circulation

fans and enabling excellent heat dissipation.l Protecting itself against dust, adapting to different environments even though in adverse

air conditions.l Being capable of working with the distributed or separated base stations and meeting the

requirements in different scenarios.

StructureThere are two types of OMBs, that is, the AC OMB and DC OMB.

The AC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, AC/DC power equipment, and AC surge protectionbox, as shown in Figure 10-2.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

Page 250: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-2 Hardware structure of the AC OMB

(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) AC/DC power equipment (4) AC surge protection box

The DC OMB houses the HEUA, BBU, and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 10-3.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 251: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-3 Hardware structure of the DC OMB

(1) HEUA (2) BBU (3) DCDU-03B

Specifications

Table 10-1 lists the specifications of the OMB.

Table 10-1 Specifications of the OMB

Item Specification

Dimensions 600 mm x 240 mm x 390 mm (height x widthx depth)

Weight OMB subrack: ≤ 15 kgAC OMB: ≤ 25 kgDC OMB: ≤ 22.5kg

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

Page 252: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Item Specification

Temperature Without solar radiation: -40°C to +50°CShort-term working at 50°C to 55°CNOTE

The short-term work indicates that the continuouswork does not exceed 96 hours or the accumulatedworking time in a year does not exceed 15 days.

Relative humidity 5% to 100%

10.3 IMB03The Indoor Mini Box (IMB03) is an indoor subrack with a small capacity. It houses a built-inBBU, AC/DC power equipment, DCDU, or other power equipment.

Exterior

Figure 10-4 shows an IMB03.

Figure 10-4 IMB03

(1) Front cover plate of the IMB03 (2) Protection cover

(3) Warning label to avoid treading (4) Slots of internal modules in the IMB03

Functions

The IMB03 performs the following functions:l Provides a 3 U space for a distributed base station.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 253: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

l Supports 220 V single-phase AC input and 110 V dual-live-wire AC input.l Supports power input of -48 V DC.l Supports various installation modes, including the wall-mounting mode, rack-mounting

mode, and combined-with-IFS06 mode.l Provides a well-developed function of heat dissipation and facilitates cabling of internal

modules.

StructureThere are two types of IMB03, that is, the DC IMB03 and AC IMB03.

A DC IMB03 houses the BBU and DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 DC IMB03

(1) DCDU-03B (2) BBU

An AC IMB03 houses a BBU and AC/DC power equipment, as shown in Figure 10-6.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

Page 254: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-6 AC IMB03

(1) AC/DC power equipment (2) BBU

Specifications

Table 10-2 lists the specifications of the IMB03.

Table 10-2 Specifications of the IMB03

Item Specification

Dimensions 560 mm (22.05 in.) x 425 mm (16.73 in.) x180 mm (7.09 in.) (height x width x depth)

Weight 10 kg

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 255: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

10.4 DCDU-03The Direct Current Distribution Unit-03 (DCDU-03) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet. The height of the DCDU-03 is 1 U. It can be classified into the DCDU-03B andDCDU-03C according to the configured MCBs and application scenarios. The two models havethe same exterior, engineering specifications, and ports.

Exterior

Figure 10-7 shows the DCDU-03.

Figure 10-7 DCDU-03

Functions

The DCDU-03 provides nine -48 V DC outputs and different MCB configurations to meet thepower distribution requirements of the scenarios of distributed and separated base stations.

Table 10-3 describes the DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03.

Table 10-3 DC power distribution functions of the DCDU-03

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal

PowerConsumptionEquipment

MCBSpecification

MCBQuantity

Application Scenario

DCDU-03B LOAD0 toLOAD5

RRU 20 A 6 Distributedbase station/Mini basestationLOAD6 to

LOAD8BBU and thetransmissionequipment ofthe customer

12 A 3

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

Page 256: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

DCDUModel

DC OutputTerminal

PowerConsumptionEquipment

MCBSpecification

MCBQuantity

Application Scenario

DCDU-03C LOAD0 toLOAD5

Transmission equipmentof thecustomer

12 A 6 Separatedmacro basestation in the-48 V DCpowersupply/Transmission cabinet

LOAD6 BBU 12 A 1

LOAD7 Transmission equipmentof thecustomer

6 A 1

LOAD8 Fan box 6 A 1

Ports

Figure 10-8 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.

Figure 10-8 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03

Table 10-4 describes the ports on the panel of the DCDU-03.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 257: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 10-4 Ports on the panel of the DCDU-03

Port Specification Cross-Sectional Area(Unit: mm2)

Remarks

DC inputterminal

Supports theM6 2-hole OTterminal

l DCDU-03B: 25l DCDU-03C: 25

When the DCDU-03 is usedin the transmission cabinet,the cross-sectional area ofthe input power cable is 4mm2.

DC outputterminal

LOAD0 toLOAD8 (fromleft to right)LOAD0 toLOAD8

2.5 l Three rows of wiringterminals for outputs:NEG(-), RTN(+), andPGND, where, the lastthree pairs of the PGNDwiring terminals supportthe grounding of the M42-hole OT terminals,which are marked in redin Figure 10-8

l Supports the outputpower cable with amaximum cross-sectional area of 6 mm2

10.5 AC/DC Power EquipmentThe AC/DC power equipment consists of the 4815 power system and 2-DC-input powerdistribution box. The equipment is used to lead 220 V AC input power into the cabinet, convertthe 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power through the AC/DC PSUs, and supply -48 V DCpower to the components in the cabinet.

Appearance

Figure 10-9 shows the AC/DC power equipment.

Figure 10-9 AC/DC power equipment

(1) AC power supply socket (2) Wiring terminal for the RRU

(3) Wiring terminal for the transmission equipment (4) Power distribution control switch for the RRU

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

Page 258: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

(5) Power distribution control switch for the transmissionequipment

(6) Rectifier

(7) Monitoring port (8) DC output port LOAD1

(9) DC output port LOAD2 (10) Output port for the batteries BATT

InterfaceTable 10-5 describes the panel of the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 10-5 Panel of the AC/DC power equipment

InterfaceType

Label Description Connector Type

AC powersupply socket

INPUT AC power supply socket 3-pin male connector

Monitoringport

RS232 Reserved port -

RS485 Monitoring port for therectifier

RJ-45 connector

COM Reserved port -

DC output port LOAD1 Output port for the BBU andHEUA(10A)

H4 connector

LOAD2 Output port for thetransmission equipment(20A)

H4 connector

BAT Output port for the batteries(20A)

H4 connector

DC outputwiringterminal

RRU Wiring terminal for the RRUpower cable(12A)

OT terminal

TM Wiring terminal for thepower cable for thetransmission equipment(4A)

OT terminal

LEDTable 10-6 describes the LEDs on the panel of the rectifier in the AC/DC power equipment.

Table 10-6 LEDs on the panel of the rectifier

Label Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Run LED ON The rectifier is running properly.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 259: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Label Color Name Status Description

OFF An error occurs during the runningof the rectifier.

ALARM Yellow Alarm LED ON Output overcurrent alarm orovertemperature alarm

Blinking The communication is disrupted.

OFF The rectifier is running properly.

FAULT Red Fault LED ON Fan faults, output overvoltage, andexternal short circuit.

OFF The rectifier is running properly.

Table 10-7 describes the LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module in the AC/DC powerequipment.

Table 10-7 LEDs on the panel of the monitoring module

Label Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Run LED Blinking at0.5 Hz

The module is running properly.

Blinking at 4Hz

The module is not faulty but unableto communicate with the PMUproperly.

ALM Red Alarm LED ON An alarm is generated.

OFF No alarm is generated.

DIP SwitchesFigure 10-10 shows the DIP switches on the PMU.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

Page 260: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-10 DIP switches on the PMU

Table 10-8 describes the settings of the DIP switches on the PMU.

Table 10-8 Settings of the DIP switches on the PMU

No. Function Operation

1~5 Defines the communicationaddress of the PMU

(1) Switches 1 to 5correspond to bits 0 to 4. ON:1, OFF: 0For example: to set theaddress of PMU to 3, setswitches 3 to 5 as OFF.(2) Default setting beforedelivery:1 (BIT0), ON2 (BIT1), ON3 (BIT2), OFF4 (BIT3), OFF5 (BIT4), OFF

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 261: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

No. Function Operation

6 Selects baud rate forcommunicating with the BTS

Set as ON, indicating that thebaud rate is 9600. (If it is setas OFF, the baud rate is19200.)

7 and 8 Reserved and not defined Set as OFF

10.6 SLPUThe signal lightning protection unit (SLPU), which can be optionally configured with the UFLP,UELP, or USLP2, provides the signal surge protection.

10.6.1 Exterior of SLPUThe SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space.

10.6.2 UELPEach Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for fourpaths of E1/T1 signals.

10.6.3 UFLPThe universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit,each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.

10.6.4 USLP2The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protectionunit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

10.6.1 Exterior of SLPUThe SLPU has a case structure, which requires a 19-inch wide and 1 U high space.

Figure 10-11 shows the SLPU.

Figure 10-11 SLPU

10.6.2 UELPEach Universal E1/T1 Lightning Protection Unit (UELP) provides surge protection for fourpaths of E1/T1 signals.

PanelFigure 10-12 shows the panel of the UELP.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

Page 262: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Figure 10-12 UELP panel

PortsTable 10-9 lists the ports of the UELP.

Table 10-9 Ports of the UELP

Label Connector Description

INSIDE DB25 connector Connected to the board fortransmission in the base station

OUTSIDE DB26 connector Connected to the externaltransmission devices

DIP SwitchThe UELP has one DIP switch, which is used to determine whether the receiving end is grounded.The DIP switch has four DIP bits. Figure 10-13 shows the DIP switch on the UELP.

Figure 10-13 DIP switch on the UELP

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 263: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 10-10 describes the DIP switch on the UELP.

Table 10-10 DIP switch on the UELP

DIPSwitch

Bit Status Description

1 2 3 4

S1 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not grounded

Other status Grounded

NOTEThe 75-ohm E1 cable can be either grounded or not grounded, whereas the 120-ohm E1 cable and the 100-ohm T1 cable cannot be grounded.

10.6.3 UFLPThe universal FE/GE lightning protection (UFLP) board is a universal FE surge protection unit,each UFLP supports 2-way FE surge protection.

PanelFigure 10-14 shows the panel of the UFLP.

Figure 10-14 Panel of the UFLP

PortsTable 10-11 describes the ports on the panel of the UFLP.

Table 10-11 Ports on the panel of the UFLP

Port Location Label Connector Type Description

INSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to theboard fortransmission in thebase station

OUTSIDE side FE0, FE1 RJ-45 Connected to theexternaltransmissiondevices

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

Page 264: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

10.6.4 USLP2The Universal Signal Lightning Protection Unit Type 2 (USLP2) is a dry contact surge protectionunit. It is optional and can be installed in the SLPU.

PanelFigure 10-15 shows the panel of the USLP2.

Figure 10-15 Panel of the USLP2

PortThere are four output ports and two input ports on the USLP2. Table 10-12 lists the ports on thepanel of the USLP2.

Table 10-12 Ports on the panel of the USLP2

Label Port Type Quantity Description

IN0, IN1, IN2,and IN3

4-pin 4 Input ports used toconnect the customizedalarm devices.

OUT0, OUT1 RJ45 2 Output ports used toconnect the EXT-ALMport of the UEIU orUPEU in the cabinet.

Figure 10-16 shows the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports onthe USLP2.

Figure 10-16 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2

1234 1234 1234 12348642

75318642

7531

IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3OUT0 OUT1

Table 10-13 lists the mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on theUSLP2.

10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900BBU3900

Hardware Description

10-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2010-10-25)

Page 265: BBU3900 Hardware Description(V100R003_03)

Table 10-13 Mapping relationship between the pins in the input and output ports on the USLP2

Input Output

Label Pin Label Pin

IN0 IN0.1 OUT1 OUT1.1

IN0.2 OUT1.2

IN0.3 OUT1.4

IN0.4 OUT1.5

IN1 IN1.1 OUT1.3

IN1.2 OUT1.6

IN1.3 OUT1.7

IN1.4 OUT1.8

IN2 IN2.1 OUT0 OUT0.1

IN2.2 OUT0.2

IN2.3 OUT0.4

IN2.4 OUT0.5

IN3 IN3.1 OUT0.3

IN3.2 OUT0.6

IN3.3 OUT0.7

IN3.4 OUT0.8

For details about the application of the USLP2, see 2.3 Configuration of the SLPU.

BBU3900Hardware Description 10 Auxiliary Devices of the BBU3900

Issue 03 (2010-10-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19